1 #LyX 2.3 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
56 \maintain_unincluded_children false
58 \language_package default
61 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
62 \font_sans "lmss" "default"
63 \font_typewriter "lmtt" "default"
64 \font_math "auto" "auto"
65 \font_default_family default
66 \use_non_tex_fonts false
69 \font_sf_scale 100 100
70 \font_tt_scale 100 100
72 \use_dash_ligatures false
74 \default_output_format pdf2
76 \bibtex_command bibtex
77 \index_command default
81 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
82 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
86 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
87 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
88 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
93 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
94 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
97 \use_package amsmath 1
98 \use_package amssymb 1
101 \use_package mathdots 1
102 \use_package mathtools 1
103 \use_package mhchem 1
104 \use_package stackrel 1
105 \use_package stmaryrd 1
106 \use_package undertilde 1
108 \cite_engine_type default
112 \paperorientation portrait
117 \notefontcolor #0000ff
134 \paragraph_separation skip
137 \math_numbering_side default
138 \quotes_style english
142 \paperpagestyle default
143 \tracking_changes false
144 \output_changes false
158 by the \SpecialChar LyX
163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
165 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
166 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
167 Documentation mailing list:
168 \begin_inset CommandInset href
170 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
182 \begin_inset Newline newline
186 \begin_inset Newline newline
190 \begin_inset Note Note
193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
194 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
195 \begin_inset Newline newline
200 http://wiki.lyx.org/\SpecialChar LyX
201 /DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide
209 \begin_layout Standard
210 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
211 LatexCommand tableofcontents
218 \begin_layout Chapter
222 \begin_layout Section
223 What is \SpecialChar LyX
227 \begin_layout Standard
229 is a document preparation system.
230 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
231 scripts, publishable books, business
232 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
233 It is unlike most other
234 \begin_inset Quotes eld
238 \begin_inset Quotes erd
241 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
243 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
244 \begin_inset Quotes eld
248 \begin_inset Quotes erd
252 \begin_inset Quotes eld
256 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
259 pt type, left justified, 5
260 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
264 \begin_inset Quotes erd
269 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
273 \begin_layout Standard
274 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
279 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
283 \begin_layout Standard
288 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
289 's philosophy: most importantly,
290 the format of all of the manuals.
291 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
292 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
298 manual describes that, too.
301 \begin_layout Section
306 \begin_layout Standard
307 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
308 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
310 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
311 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
315 \begin_layout Standard
316 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
317 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
318 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
320 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
321 only a vertical scrollbar.
322 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
323 The first case is large images.
324 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
325 image and use the option
336 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
339 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
340 this doesn't work for equations yet.
343 \begin_layout Standard
344 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
345 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
351 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
353 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
360 \begin_layout Section
364 \begin_layout Standard
365 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
367 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
369 Just select the manual you want to read from the
376 \begin_layout Section
377 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
379 \begin_inset CommandInset label
381 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
388 \begin_layout Standard
389 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
390 can be configured via the menu
392 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
396 \begin_inset Index idx
399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
406 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
408 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
409 packages are available.
410 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
412 Although this configuration has already been done when \SpecialChar LyX
414 your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
415 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
419 \begin_inset space \space{}
422 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
423 classes, and which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
425 To force \SpecialChar LyX
426 to re-inspect your system, you should use
428 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
432 \begin_inset Index idx
435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
436 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
442 You should then restart \SpecialChar LyX
443 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
446 \begin_layout Section
449 \begin_inset CommandInset label
451 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
458 \begin_layout Standard
459 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
460 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
461 installed, but you will not be
462 able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it installed.
463 However, some \SpecialChar LyX
464 documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
465 PDFs and the like, and every \SpecialChar LyX
466 document can always be output as plain text
470 \begin_layout Standard
471 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
472 or DocBook classes or packages.
473 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
474 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
477 \begin_layout Standard
478 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
479 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
480 has found on your system are listed in a file you can
483 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
491 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
492 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
495 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
499 \begin_inset Index idx
502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
503 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
511 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
518 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
522 \begin_layout Chapter
523 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
527 \begin_layout Section
528 Basic File Operations
529 \begin_inset Index idx
532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
541 \begin_layout Standard
546 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
547 in addition to some more advanced operations:
550 \begin_layout Itemize
572 \begin_layout Itemize
588 arg "buffer-new-template"
594 \begin_layout Itemize
616 \begin_layout Itemize
626 \begin_layout Itemize
640 \begin_layout Itemize
662 \begin_layout Itemize
674 arg "buffer-write-as"
680 \begin_layout Itemize
694 \begin_layout Itemize
708 \begin_layout Standard
709 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
710 a few minor differences.
713 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
724 command lists the available templates.
725 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
726 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
727 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
733 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
735 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
742 \begin_layout Standard
743 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
752 \begin_inset Quotes eld
756 \begin_inset Quotes erd
760 \begin_inset Quotes eld
764 \begin_inset Quotes erd
768 \begin_inset Quotes eld
772 \begin_inset Quotes erd
775 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
776 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
777 is just that — a big, blank space.
785 \begin_layout Standard
806 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
811 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
814 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
832 will reload the document from disk.
833 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
834 and want to restore it to the last save.
843 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
844 them as your changes.
847 \begin_layout Section
848 Basic Editing Features
849 \begin_inset Index idx
852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
859 \begin_inset CommandInset label
861 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
868 \begin_layout Standard
869 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
870 can perform cut and paste operations
871 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
872 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
873 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
874 editing features and how to access
876 We will start with cut and paste.
879 \begin_layout Standard
880 As you might expect, the
884 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
885 various other editing features.
886 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
890 \begin_layout Itemize
896 \begin_inset Index idx
899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
928 \begin_layout Itemize
934 \begin_inset Index idx
937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
966 \begin_layout Itemize
972 \begin_inset Index idx
975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1000 \begin_layout Itemize
1004 \begin_inset space ~
1010 \begin_layout Itemize
1014 \begin_inset space ~
1020 \begin_layout Itemize
1024 \begin_inset space ~
1028 \begin_inset space ~
1034 \begin_inset Index idx
1037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1046 \begin_inset Index idx
1049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1064 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1074 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1080 \begin_layout Standard
1081 The first three are self-explanatory.
1082 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1083 and other programs by
1104 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1105 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1110 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1111 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1112 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1113 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1114 into individual cells.
1118 \begin_inset space ~
1123 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1124 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1128 \begin_layout Standard
1132 \begin_inset space ~
1137 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1139 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1141 \begin_inset space ~
1148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1154 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1155 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1156 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1158 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1162 \begin_inset space \space{}
1165 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1166 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1169 \begin_inset space ~
1172 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1174 \begin_inset space ~
1178 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1182 \begin_inset space ~
1191 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1192 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1194 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1198 \begin_inset space ~
1203 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1204 start a new paragraph.
1205 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1206 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1211 \begin_inset space ~
1214 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1216 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1220 \begin_inset space ~
1228 \begin_inset space ~
1231 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1234 paste from the primary selection.
1235 This is normally the currently selected text.
1238 \begin_layout Standard
1241 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1243 \begin_inset space ~
1247 \begin_inset space ~
1255 \begin_inset space ~
1259 \begin_inset space ~
1265 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1271 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1274 \begin_inset space ~
1283 \begin_inset space ~
1288 button to skip the current word.
1292 \begin_inset space ~
1297 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1301 \begin_inset space ~
1306 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1308 If the toggle is set, searching for
1309 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1317 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1320 will not match the word
1321 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1329 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1335 Match whole words only
1337 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1338 to only find complete words, e.
1339 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1343 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1351 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1355 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1363 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1368 offers also an advanced
1371 \begin_inset space ~
1375 \begin_inset space ~
1380 feature that is described in section
1381 \begin_inset space ~
1385 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1387 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1394 \begin_layout Standard
1395 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1396 \begin_inset space \space{}
1400 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1404 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1408 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1410 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1415 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1422 \begin_layout Standard
1426 arg "inset-select-all"
1429 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1430 When the cursor is inside an inset
1433 arg "inset-select-all"
1436 selects the content of the inset.
1440 arg "inset-select-all"
1443 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1448 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1451 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1455 \begin_layout Section
1457 \begin_inset Index idx
1460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1467 \begin_inset Index idx
1470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1477 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1479 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1486 \begin_layout Standard
1487 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1489 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1492 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1495 or the toolbar button
1501 to undo some mistake.
1502 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1504 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1507 or the toolbar button
1514 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1518 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1521 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1522 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1525 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1528 \begin_layout Standard
1529 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1531 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1535 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1538 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1539 This is a consequence of the 100
1540 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1543 step undo limit mentioned above.
1546 \begin_layout Standard
1555 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1557 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1561 \begin_layout Section
1563 \begin_inset Index idx
1566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1575 \begin_layout Standard
1576 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1579 \begin_layout Enumerate
1584 \begin_layout Itemize
1589 once anywhere in the edit window.
1590 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1594 \begin_layout Enumerate
1599 \begin_layout Itemize
1606 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1609 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1612 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1613 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1616 \begin_layout Itemize
1617 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1620 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1627 \begin_layout Enumerate
1628 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1632 \begin_layout Standard
1633 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1634 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1638 \begin_layout Section
1640 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1642 name "sec:Navigating"
1647 \begin_inset Index idx
1650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1659 \begin_layout Standard
1661 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1664 \begin_layout Itemize
1669 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1670 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1673 \begin_layout Itemize
1674 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1676 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1678 \begin_inset space ~
1683 or by the toolbar button
1686 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1692 \begin_layout Itemize
1693 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1695 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1698 and use the same menu to return to them.
1699 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1702 \begin_layout Standard
1706 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1711 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1712 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1714 \begin_inset space ~
1719 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1720 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1721 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1722 your last editing position.
1725 \begin_layout Standard
1730 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1734 \begin_layout Subsection
1736 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1738 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1743 \begin_inset Index idx
1746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1747 Navigating ! Outline
1753 \begin_inset Index idx
1756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1765 \begin_layout Standard
1766 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1767 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1768 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1770 \begin_inset space ~
1774 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1776 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1780 ), or notes, or citations (see section
1781 \begin_inset space ~
1785 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1787 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1792 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1796 \begin_layout Standard
1797 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1798 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1799 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1800 dialog and to modify the citation.
1803 \begin_layout Standard
1808 field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear in the outline.
1809 For example, if you are displaying the list of
1811 Labels and References
1813 and wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1815 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1819 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1822 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1825 \begin_layout Standard
1826 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1827 you further to control the display.
1832 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1833 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1839 option keeps it in the current view state.
1840 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1841 \begin_inset space ~
1844 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1845 \begin_inset space ~
1848 3, the subsections of sections
1849 \begin_inset space ~
1852 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1857 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1858 \begin_inset space ~
1862 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1864 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1868 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1872 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1875 \begin_layout Standard
1882 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1883 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1897 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1898 So, for example, you can move section
1899 \begin_inset space ~
1903 \begin_inset space ~
1906 2.4 or after section
1907 \begin_inset space ~
1912 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1925 (or the corresponding key bindings
1933 ) you can change the level of sections.
1934 So you can for example make section
1935 \begin_inset space ~
1939 \begin_inset space ~
1943 \begin_inset space ~
1949 \begin_layout Standard
1950 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole
1951 section to copy, cut or delete it.
1954 \begin_layout Subsection
1955 Horizontal Scrolling
1956 \begin_inset Index idx
1959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1960 Navigating ! Horizontal Scrolling
1968 \begin_layout Standard
1970 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because the standard output page formats
1972 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1976 \begin_inset space \space{}
1980 \begin_inset space ~
1983 A4 are less wide than PC or laptop screens.
1984 Therefore you will get troubles in the output of your document if document
1985 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
1989 \begin_layout Standard
1990 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
1994 \begin_layout Itemize
1996 is used on a small tablet computer
1999 \begin_layout Itemize
2000 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
2004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2012 \begin_inset space ~
2025 \begin_layout Itemize
2026 Math constructs with long command names
2029 \begin_layout Standard
2030 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2031 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2033 As example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2034 windows so that table
2035 \begin_inset space ~
2039 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2041 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2046 You will now see a dotted red line at the right or the left side of the
2048 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2049 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2052 \begin_layout Standard
2053 \begin_inset Float table
2059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2060 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2063 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2065 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2069 Horizontal scrolling test.
2077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2079 \begin_inset Tabular
2080 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2081 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2082 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2083 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2084 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2126 \begin_layout Section
2127 Input/Word Completion
2128 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2130 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2135 \begin_inset Index idx
2138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2145 \begin_inset Index idx
2148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2179 \begin_layout Standard
2181 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2183 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2184 is used to propose completions.
2187 \begin_layout Standard
2188 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2191 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2196 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2203 \begin_inset space ~
2207 \begin_inset space ~
2212 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2216 \begin_inset space ~
2221 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2222 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2226 \begin_inset space ~
2232 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2233 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2234 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2235 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2238 \begin_layout Standard
2240 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2241 completions available.
2246 key to accept a proposed completion.
2247 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2248 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2249 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2256 \begin_layout Standard
2257 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2258 ing options for text.
2259 The special math option
2263 enables characters to be composed.
2264 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2265 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2268 , you can then input the characters
2269 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2277 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2280 to a formula to get it.
2281 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2282 of the math toolbar.
2283 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2287 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2288 's installation folder.
2289 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2298 \begin_layout Section
2300 \begin_inset Index idx
2303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2310 \begin_inset Index idx
2313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2342 \begin_inset Index idx
2345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2376 \begin_layout Standard
2377 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2391 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2394 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2398 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
2399 \begin_inset space ~
2403 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2405 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2412 \begin_layout Standard
2416 \begin_inset space ~
2424 \begin_inset space ~
2445 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2449 \begin_layout Labeling
2450 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2454 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2455 LatexCommand nomenclature
2457 description "Tabulator key"
2464 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2466 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2467 \begin_inset space ~
2471 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2473 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2478 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2480 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2484 , especially section
2485 \begin_inset space ~
2489 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2491 reference "subsec:Lists"
2497 If you are still confused, look in the
2502 \begin_inset Newline newline
2510 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2511 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2515 \begin_layout Labeling
2516 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2520 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2521 LatexCommand nomenclature
2523 description "Escape key"
2531 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2535 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2538 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2539 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2542 \begin_layout Labeling
2543 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2549 \begin_inset space ~
2553 \begin_inset space ~
2560 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2561 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2565 \begin_layout Standard
2566 There are three modifier keys:
2569 \begin_layout Labeling
2570 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2576 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2584 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2588 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2589 LatexCommand nomenclature
2591 description "Control key"
2596 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2597 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2601 \begin_layout Itemize
2610 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2613 \begin_layout Itemize
2622 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2625 \begin_layout Itemize
2634 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2638 \begin_layout Labeling
2639 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2645 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2653 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2657 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2658 LatexCommand nomenclature
2660 description "Shift key"
2665 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2666 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2669 \begin_layout Labeling
2670 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2676 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2684 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2688 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2689 LatexCommand nomenclature
2691 description "Alt or Meta key"
2696 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2697 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2698 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2704 \begin_inset Newline newline
2707 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2709 menu accelerator keys
2712 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2713 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2717 \begin_layout Standard
2718 For example, the sequence
2719 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2725 \begin_inset space ~
2729 \begin_inset space ~
2735 \begin_inset space ~
2743 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2747 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2751 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2756 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2762 \begin_inset space ~
2768 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2778 \begin_layout Standard
2783 manual lists all other things bound to the
2791 \begin_layout Standard
2792 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2794 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2795 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2796 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2797 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2798 The \SpecialChar LyX
2799 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2800 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2801 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2803 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2804 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2812 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2819 followed by a capital
2826 \begin_layout Chapter
2829 \begin_inset Index idx
2832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2842 \begin_layout Section
2844 \begin_inset Index idx
2847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2856 \begin_layout Subsection
2860 \begin_layout Standard
2861 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2862 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2863 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2864 numbering schemes, and so on.
2865 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2866 and format the title of your document differently.
2869 \begin_layout Standard
2874 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2875 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2876 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2877 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
2878 picks one for you by default.
2879 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2882 \begin_layout Subsection
2884 \begin_inset Index idx
2887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2894 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2896 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2903 \begin_layout Standard
2904 You can select a class using the
2906 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2907 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2911 \begin_inset Index idx
2914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2921 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2925 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2929 \begin_layout Standard
2930 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
2935 \begin_layout Description
2936 Article for basic articles
2939 \begin_layout Description
2940 Report for basic reports
2943 \begin_layout Description
2944 Book for writing a book
2947 \begin_layout Description
2948 Letter for US-style letters
2951 \begin_layout Standard
2952 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
2953 only uses if you have installed
2954 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
2955 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
2956 distributions will include
2958 Here are some of the classes.
2959 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2961 Special Document Classes
2970 \begin_layout Description
2971 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2974 \begin_layout Description
2975 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2979 \begin_layout Description
2980 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2984 \begin_layout Description
2985 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2986 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2987 There are three article layouts available.
2988 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2989 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2990 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2991 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2993 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2996 sequential numbering
2997 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3000 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
3001 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
3002 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
3003 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
3006 \begin_layout Description
3007 Beamer Layout for presentations
3010 \begin_layout Description
3011 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
3012 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3013 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3014 with \SpecialChar LyX
3018 \begin_layout Description
3019 Chess Layout to write about chess games
3022 \begin_layout Description
3024 \begin_inset space ~
3027 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3030 \begin_layout Description
3031 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3034 \begin_layout Description
3035 Foils Used to make transparencies
3038 \begin_layout Description
3039 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3040 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3041 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3042 with \SpecialChar LyX
3046 \begin_layout Description
3047 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3048 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3051 \begin_layout Description
3052 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3055 \begin_layout Description
3056 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3059 \begin_layout Description
3060 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3061 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3062 (Is used by this document.)
3065 \begin_layout Description
3066 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3069 \begin_layout Description
3070 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3073 \begin_layout Description
3078 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3079 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3081 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3085 \begin_layout Description
3086 Slides Used to make transparencies
3089 \begin_layout Description
3091 \begin_inset space ~
3094 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3095 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3098 \begin_layout Description
3099 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3102 \begin_layout Standard
3103 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3105 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3107 Special Document Classes
3114 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3115 of the document classes.
3118 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3122 \begin_layout Standard
3123 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3125 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3126 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3128 \begin_inset Index idx
3131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3140 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3144 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3148 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3149 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3151 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3154 \begin_layout Standard
3157 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3162 , are highly specialized.
3164 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3165 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3166 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3167 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3168 by some document class.
3169 There are just too many of them.
3170 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3173 \begin_layout Standard
3174 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3175 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3179 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3182 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3183 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3184 document class for a new file.
3186 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3189 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3196 manual for information on how to install them.
3197 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3203 \begin_layout Standard
3204 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3205 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3206 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3207 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3208 class files to be used for dissertation
3209 s submitted to those universities.
3210 The \SpecialChar LyX
3211 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3213 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3217 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3223 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3226 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3228 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3230 name "subsec:Modules"
3235 \begin_inset Index idx
3238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3247 \begin_layout Standard
3248 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3249 chosen document class.
3250 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3251 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3258 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3262 \begin_inset Index idx
3265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3272 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3276 \begin_layout Standard
3277 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3278 packages or file format converters that are not always
3279 installed by default.
3281 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3282 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3283 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3284 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3286 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3287 file without the missing prerequisites.
3288 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3289 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3292 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3296 \begin_inset Index idx
3299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3300 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3306 See section Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3311 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3314 \begin_layout Standard
3315 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3323 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3325 will advise you about these things.
3333 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3335 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3337 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3342 \begin_inset Index idx
3345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3346 Document ! Local Layout
3354 \begin_layout Standard
3355 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3356 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3357 : They are intended to be used in
3358 a variety of different documents.
3359 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3360 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3361 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3362 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
3363 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3365 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3367 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3371 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3383 manual for information on how to use it.
3386 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3390 \begin_layout Standard
3391 Each class has a default set of options.
3392 Here's a quick table describing them:
3395 \begin_layout Standard
3396 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3402 \begin_layout Standard
3404 \begin_inset Tabular
3405 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3406 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3407 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3408 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3409 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3410 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3411 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3422 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3440 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3458 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3476 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3496 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3513 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3549 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3567 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3587 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3604 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3640 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3695 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3786 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3804 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3865 \begin_layout Standard
3866 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3872 \begin_layout Standard
3873 You're probably also wondering what
3874 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3878 \begin_inset space ~
3882 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3886 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3887 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3892 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3897 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3907 headings, there are also
3915 headings, and so on.
3916 We will describe these headings fully in section
3917 \begin_inset space ~
3921 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3923 reference "subsec:Headings"
3930 \begin_layout Subsection
3932 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3934 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
3939 \begin_inset Index idx
3942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3949 \begin_inset Index idx
3952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3961 \begin_layout Standard
3962 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3964 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3971 \begin_inset space ~
3979 \begin_inset space ~
3984 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3986 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
3987 doesn't support special options you want to
3988 use for your document.
3989 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
3990 -class and its options, you have to read
3994 \begin_layout Standard
3998 \begin_inset space ~
4005 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4011 \begin_inset space ~
4016 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
4017 You can choose between the following five options:
4020 \begin_layout Labeling
4021 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4026 Use default page style of current class.
4029 \begin_layout Labeling
4030 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4035 No page numbers or headings.
4038 \begin_layout Labeling
4039 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4047 \begin_layout Labeling
4048 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4053 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4054 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4055 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4056 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4059 \begin_layout Labeling
4060 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4065 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4066 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4072 \begin_inset Index idx
4075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4083 How they are defined is explained in section
4084 \begin_inset space ~
4088 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4090 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4097 \begin_layout Standard
4098 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4099 \begin_inset space ~
4103 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4105 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4112 \begin_layout Subsection
4113 Paper Size and Orientation
4114 \begin_inset Index idx
4117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4118 Document ! Paper size
4124 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4126 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4133 \begin_layout Standard
4134 You can find the following options in the menu
4137 \begin_inset space ~
4144 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4148 \begin_inset Index idx
4151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4160 \begin_layout Labeling
4161 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4165 \begin_inset space ~
4170 What size paper to print on.
4175 \begin_layout Itemize
4181 \begin_layout Itemize
4187 \begin_layout Itemize
4193 \begin_layout Itemize
4199 \begin_layout Itemize
4202 US letter, US legal, US executive
4205 \begin_layout Itemize
4211 \begin_layout Itemize
4218 \begin_layout Labeling
4219 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4224 To choose whether to output as
4235 \begin_layout Labeling
4236 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4240 \begin_inset space ~
4245 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4246 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4249 \begin_layout Subsection
4251 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4253 name "subsec:Margins"
4258 \begin_inset Index idx
4261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4268 \begin_inset Index idx
4271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4280 \begin_layout Standard
4281 Paper margins are set in the menu
4283 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4287 \begin_inset Index idx
4290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4299 \begin_layout Standard
4300 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4301 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4302 the paper format and the font size into account.
4305 \begin_layout Subsection
4309 \begin_layout Standard
4310 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4316 That includes the paragraph environments.
4317 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4318 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4319 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4321 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4322 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4326 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4330 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4332 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4333 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4334 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4337 \begin_layout Section
4338 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4339 \begin_inset Index idx
4342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4343 Paragraph ! Indentation
4351 \begin_layout Subsection
4353 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4355 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4362 \begin_layout Standard
4363 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4364 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4367 \begin_layout Standard
4368 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4369 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4370 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4371 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4375 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4381 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4382 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4383 language than English.
4385 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4388 \begin_layout Standard
4389 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4390 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4391 into \SpecialChar LyX
4393 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4396 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4398 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4399 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4400 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4407 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4408 goes to produce a printable file.
4413 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4415 gives you the ability globally to change
4419 these pre-coded spacings.
4420 We will explain more later.
4423 \begin_layout Subsection
4424 Paragraph Separation
4425 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4427 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4432 \begin_inset Index idx
4435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4436 Paragraph ! Separation
4444 \begin_layout Standard
4452 \begin_inset space ~
4460 \begin_inset space ~
4467 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4471 \begin_inset Index idx
4474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4480 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4483 \begin_layout Subsection
4487 \begin_layout Standard
4488 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4491 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4493 \begin_inset space ~
4498 dialog and toggle the
4501 \begin_inset space ~
4506 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4509 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4513 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4514 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4518 \begin_layout Standard
4519 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4520 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4523 \begin_layout Subsection
4525 \begin_inset Index idx
4528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4529 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4537 \begin_layout Standard
4540 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4544 \begin_inset Index idx
4547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4556 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4560 \begin_inset space ~
4569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4570 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4576 \begin_inset Index idx
4579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4586 installed to use this feature.
4591 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4593 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4595 \begin_inset space ~
4600 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4601 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4604 \begin_layout Section
4605 Paragraph Environments
4606 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4608 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4613 \begin_inset Index idx
4616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4617 Paragraph ! Environments
4623 \begin_inset Index idx
4626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4627 Paragraph environments|(
4635 \begin_layout Subsection
4639 \begin_layout Standard
4640 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4643 \begin_layout Standard
4652 } \SpecialChar ldots
4662 \begin_inset Newline newline
4665 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4667 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4668 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4669 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4678 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4681 \begin_layout Standard
4682 A paragraph environment is simply a
4683 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4687 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4690 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4691 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4692 scheme, labels, and so on.
4693 Additionally, you can
4694 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4698 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4701 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4702 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4703 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4704 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4706 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4708 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4711 \begin_layout Standard
4712 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4713 \begin_inset Graphics
4714 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4720 at the left end of the toolbar.
4722 will change the environment of the
4726 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4727 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4728 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4732 \begin_layout Standard
4741 create a new paragraph using the
4745 paragraph environment.
4747 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4751 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4754 because if you are in one of these environments:
4757 \begin_layout Itemize
4763 \begin_layout Itemize
4769 \begin_layout Itemize
4775 \begin_layout Itemize
4781 \begin_layout Itemize
4787 \begin_layout Itemize
4793 \begin_layout Itemize
4799 \begin_layout Standard
4801 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4805 , rather than resetting it to
4810 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4811 \begin_inset space ~
4815 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4817 reference "sec:Nesting"
4824 \begin_layout Subsection
4828 \begin_layout Standard
4829 The default paragraph environment is
4834 It creates a plain paragraph.
4836 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4837 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4838 this manual) are in the
4845 \begin_layout Standard
4846 You can nest a paragraph using the
4850 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4858 \begin_layout Subsection
4860 \begin_inset Index idx
4863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4872 \begin_layout Standard
4873 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
4874 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
4876 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4880 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4883 for thanks or contact information.
4884 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4885 places all of this on a separate page
4886 along with today's date.
4887 For other types of documents, the title
4888 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4892 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4895 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4899 \begin_layout Standard
4901 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4915 Here's how you use them:
4918 \begin_layout Itemize
4919 Put the title of your document in the
4926 \begin_layout Itemize
4927 Put the author name in the
4934 \begin_layout Itemize
4935 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4936 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4942 Note that using this environment is optional.
4943 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4944 will automatically insert today's date.
4945 If you don't want a date, use the option
4947 Suppress default date on front page
4951 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4952 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4954 \begin_inset space ~
4962 \begin_layout Standard
4963 You can use footnotes to insert
4964 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4968 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4971 or contact information.
4974 \begin_layout Subsection
4976 \begin_inset Index idx
4979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4986 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4988 name "subsec:Headings"
4995 \begin_layout Standard
4996 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4998 takes care of the numbering for you.
5001 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5003 \begin_inset Index idx
5006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5007 Section headings ! Numbered
5015 \begin_layout Standard
5016 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
5020 \begin_layout Enumerate
5026 \begin_layout Enumerate
5032 \begin_layout Enumerate
5038 \begin_layout Enumerate
5044 \begin_layout Enumerate
5050 \begin_layout Enumerate
5056 \begin_layout Enumerate
5062 \begin_layout Standard
5064 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
5065 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5066 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
5069 \begin_layout Standard
5070 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5071 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
5072 You group the book into chapters.
5074 does a similar grouping:
5077 \begin_layout Itemize
5082 is divided into either
5093 \begin_layout Itemize
5105 \begin_layout Itemize
5117 \begin_layout Itemize
5129 \begin_layout Itemize
5141 \begin_layout Itemize
5153 \begin_layout Standard
5154 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5162 Not all document types use the
5166 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5171 is the top-level heading.
5179 \begin_layout Standard
5184 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5185 labels it with its number,
5186 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5188 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5190 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5194 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5200 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5202 \begin_inset Index idx
5205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5206 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5214 \begin_layout Standard
5215 The unnumbered section headings have a
5216 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5220 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5223 at the end of their name.
5224 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5225 the table of contents, see section
5226 \begin_inset space ~
5230 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5239 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5240 Changing the Numbering
5241 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5243 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5250 \begin_layout Standard
5251 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5252 in the Table of Contents.
5253 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5255 Just as certain classes start with
5269 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5279 This is something you can change.
5282 \begin_layout Standard
5285 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5289 \begin_inset Index idx
5292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5301 \begin_inset space ~
5305 \begin_inset space ~
5310 you will see two counters.
5315 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5316 numbers a section heading.
5317 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5321 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5322 Short Titles of Headings
5323 \begin_inset Index idx
5326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5327 Section headings ! Short titles
5333 \begin_inset Argument 1
5336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5343 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5345 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5352 \begin_layout Standard
5353 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5354 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5355 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5356 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5359 \begin_layout Standard
5361 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5362 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5363 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5364 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5367 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5369 \begin_inset space ~
5375 This will insert a box labeled
5376 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5380 \begin_inset space ~
5384 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5387 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5388 This also works for captions inside floats.
5389 There can only be one short title per title.
5392 \begin_layout Standard
5393 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5396 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5400 \begin_layout Standard
5401 The following information applies to all section headings:
5404 \begin_layout Itemize
5405 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5408 \begin_layout Itemize
5409 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5412 \begin_layout Itemize
5413 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5416 \begin_layout Itemize
5417 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5420 \begin_layout Subsection
5424 \begin_layout Standard
5426 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5440 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5441 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5442 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5443 the text they contain.
5444 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5452 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5455 \begin_layout Standard
5456 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5465 when you start a new paragraph.
5466 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5470 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5471 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5472 have to change back to the
5476 environment yourself.
5479 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5481 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5488 \begin_inset Index idx
5491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5500 \begin_layout Standard
5501 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5502 time for the differences.
5511 are identical except for one difference:
5515 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5524 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5527 \begin_layout Standard
5528 Here's an example of the
5541 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5543 See – no indentation!
5547 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5548 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5549 the other paragraph.
5552 \begin_layout Standard
5553 Here's another example, this time in the
5560 \begin_layout Quotation
5566 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5567 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5568 the first line, then
5572 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5576 you were quoting other text.
5579 \begin_layout Quotation
5580 Here's a new paragraph.
5581 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5582 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5585 \begin_layout Standard
5586 As the examples show,
5590 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5591 They should put quotes in the
5596 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5600 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5603 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5605 \begin_inset Index idx
5608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5615 \begin_inset Index idx
5618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5625 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5634 \begin_layout Standard
5639 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5645 \begin_inset Newline newline
5648 Which I did not rehearse!
5652 It could be much worse.
5653 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5655 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5656 indented a bit more than the first.
5657 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5663 \begin_inset Newline newline
5666 And make things look fine
5667 \begin_inset Newline newline
5673 arg "newline-insert newline"
5679 \begin_layout Standard
5684 does not indent both margins.
5685 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5686 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5689 arg "newline-insert newline"
5695 \begin_layout Subsection
5697 \begin_inset Index idx
5700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5707 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5716 \begin_layout Standard
5718 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5728 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5729 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5738 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5739 lets you provide your own label.
5740 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5741 describing some general features of all four of them.
5744 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5748 \begin_layout Standard
5749 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5751 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5752 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5761 reset the environment to
5765 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5766 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5767 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5771 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5775 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5782 \begin_layout Standard
5783 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5784 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5785 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5787 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5788 you read all of section
5789 \begin_inset space ~
5793 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5795 reference "sec:Nesting"
5802 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5804 \begin_inset Index idx
5807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5814 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5823 \begin_layout Standard
5824 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5828 paragraph environment.
5829 It has the following properties:
5832 \begin_layout Itemize
5833 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5837 \begin_layout Itemize
5839 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5842 \begin_layout Itemize
5843 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5847 \begin_layout Itemize
5848 The items can have any length.
5850 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5851 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5858 \begin_layout Itemize
5863 environment inside another
5867 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5871 \begin_layout Itemize
5872 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5875 \begin_layout Itemize
5877 always shows the same symbol on screen.
5880 \begin_layout Itemize
5882 \begin_inset space ~
5886 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5888 reference "sec:Nesting"
5892 for a full explanation of nesting.
5896 \begin_layout Standard
5897 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5906 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5909 \begin_layout Standard
5910 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5911 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5914 \begin_layout Itemize
5915 The label for the first level
5919 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5923 \begin_layout Itemize
5924 The label for the second level is a dash.
5928 \begin_layout Itemize
5929 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5933 \begin_layout Itemize
5934 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5938 \begin_layout Itemize
5939 Back out to the third level.
5943 \begin_layout Itemize
5944 Back to the second level.
5948 \begin_layout Itemize
5949 Back to the outermost level.
5952 \begin_layout Standard
5953 These are the default labels for an
5958 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5960 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5963 dialog in the submenu
5968 \begin_inset Index idx
5971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5977 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
5981 \begin_layout Standard
5982 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5983 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5985 \begin_inset space ~
5989 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5991 reference "sec:Nesting"
5998 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6000 \begin_inset Index idx
6003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6010 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6012 name "sec:Enumerate"
6019 \begin_layout Standard
6024 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6025 It has these properties:
6028 \begin_layout Enumerate
6029 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6033 \begin_layout Enumerate
6034 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6038 \begin_layout Enumerate
6040 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6043 \begin_layout Enumerate
6048 environment resets the counter to one.
6051 \begin_layout Enumerate
6064 \begin_layout Enumerate
6065 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6066 Items can have any length.
6069 \begin_layout Enumerate
6070 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6073 \begin_layout Enumerate
6074 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6077 \begin_layout Enumerate
6078 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6082 \begin_layout Standard
6091 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6093 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6094 labels the four different levels in an
6101 \begin_layout Enumerate
6102 The first level of an
6106 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6110 \begin_layout Enumerate
6111 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6115 \begin_layout Enumerate
6116 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6120 \begin_layout Enumerate
6121 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6124 \begin_layout Enumerate
6125 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6130 \begin_layout Enumerate
6131 Back to the third level
6135 \begin_layout Enumerate
6136 Back to the second level.
6140 \begin_layout Enumerate
6141 Back to the outermost level.
6144 \begin_layout Standard
6145 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6149 environment, see section
6150 \begin_inset space ~
6154 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6156 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6161 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6165 \begin_layout Standard
6166 There is more to nesting
6170 environments than we've stated here.
6171 You should read section
6172 \begin_inset space ~
6176 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6178 reference "sec:Nesting"
6182 to learn more about nesting.
6185 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6187 \begin_inset Index idx
6190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6199 \begin_layout Standard
6200 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6204 list has no fixed label.
6205 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6207 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6211 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6214 of the first line as the label.
6218 \begin_layout Description
6219 Example: This is an example of the
6226 \begin_layout Standard
6228 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6232 \begin_layout Standard
6234 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6238 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6241 it is meant that the first usage of the
6245 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6247 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6255 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6260 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6261 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6263 \begin_inset space ~
6269 \begin_inset space ~
6273 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6275 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6279 for more information.) Here is an example:
6282 \begin_layout Description
6284 \begin_inset space ~
6287 Example: This one shows how to use a
6290 \begin_inset space ~
6302 \begin_layout Description
6303 Usage: You should use the
6307 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6308 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6310 It's not a good idea to use a
6314 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6315 You're better off using
6327 paragraphs into them.
6330 \begin_layout Description
6331 Nesting: You can nest
6335 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6339 \begin_layout Standard
6340 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6341 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6342 them from the first line.
6345 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6347 \begin_inset Index idx
6350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6359 \begin_layout Standard
6364 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6365 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6369 \begin_layout Standard
6378 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6380 Here are its properties:
6383 \begin_layout Labeling
6384 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6386 \begin_inset space ~
6389 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6391 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6395 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6398 of each line as the item label.
6403 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6404 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6405 space as described above.
6408 \begin_layout Labeling
6409 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6410 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6411 uses different margins for the item label and the
6412 body of the item text.
6413 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6414 label width plus a little extra space.
6418 \begin_layout Labeling
6419 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6421 \begin_inset space ~
6424 width \SpecialChar LyX
6425 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6426 If the label width is larger, the label
6427 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6431 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6434 into the first line.
6435 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6436 margin of the rest of the item text.
6439 \begin_layout Labeling
6440 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6442 \begin_inset space ~
6445 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6450 environment has the same left margin.
6451 \begin_inset Newline newline
6454 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6457 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6459 \begin_inset space ~
6464 dialog (toolbar button
6467 arg "layout-paragraph"
6474 \begin_inset space ~
6479 determines the default label width.
6480 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6482 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6486 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6489 multiple times instead.
6490 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6493 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6497 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6500 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6503 \begin_inset space ~
6508 every time you alter a label in a
6513 \begin_inset Newline newline
6516 The predefined default width is the length of
6517 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6521 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6525 \begin_inset space ~
6531 \begin_layout Standard
6536 list the same way as the
6540 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6546 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6550 \begin_layout Standard
6555 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6556 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6558 \begin_inset space ~
6562 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6564 reference "sec:Nesting"
6568 to learn about nesting.
6571 \begin_layout Standard
6572 There is yet another feature of the
6576 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6577 left-justifies the item labels by
6579 You can use additional
6583 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6584 justifies the item label.
6589 are documented in section
6590 \begin_inset space ~
6594 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6596 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6601 Here are some examples:
6604 \begin_layout Labeling
6605 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6606 Left The default for
6613 \begin_layout Labeling
6614 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6615 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6622 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6625 \begin_layout Labeling
6626 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6627 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6631 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6638 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6641 \begin_layout Subsection
6643 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6645 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6650 \begin_inset Index idx
6653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6662 \begin_layout Standard
6663 The features described in this section require that the module
6665 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6667 is loaded in the document settings.
6668 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6674 \begin_inset Index idx
6677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6687 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6688 Custom Enumerate Lists
6689 \begin_inset Index idx
6692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6693 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6701 \begin_layout Standard
6703 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6706 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6709 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6710 There you add the command
6713 \begin_layout Standard
6721 \begin_layout Standard
6733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6734 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6735 Code, look at section
6736 \begin_inset space ~
6740 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6742 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6755 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6762 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6763 For capital Roman numerals replace
6775 in the command above.
6776 For Arabic numerals use
6784 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6788 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6791 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6806 \begin_layout Standard
6808 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6816 You can only number 26
6817 \begin_inset space ~
6820 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6828 \begin_layout Standard
6829 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6830 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6833 \begin_layout Standard
6834 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6837 \begin_layout Enumerate
6838 \begin_inset Argument 1
6841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6867 \begin_layout Enumerate
6868 \begin_inset Argument 1
6871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6894 \begin_layout Enumerate
6899 \begin_layout Enumerate
6900 \begin_inset Argument 1
6903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6927 \begin_layout Enumerate
6928 \begin_inset Argument 1
6931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6957 \begin_layout Standard
6958 For this list these commands were used:
6961 \begin_layout Standard
6972 \begin_inset Newline newline
6980 \begin_inset Newline newline
6988 \begin_inset Newline newline
6998 \begin_layout Standard
7005 makes the label emphasized and
7014 \begin_layout Standard
7015 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7023 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
7024 lists until you change the definition.
7032 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7034 \begin_inset Index idx
7037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7038 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
7046 \begin_layout Standard
7047 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7050 \begin_layout Enumerate
7051 \begin_inset Argument 1
7054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7073 \begin_inset Note Note
7076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7077 goes back to default numbering
7085 \begin_layout Enumerate
7089 \begin_layout Standard
7093 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7097 \begin_layout Standard
7098 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7103 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7104 to indicate that it is a resumed
7105 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7106 , but in the output.
7109 \begin_layout Standard
7110 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7118 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7127 \begin_layout Standard
7128 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7130 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7131 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7132 of a normal enumeration.
7133 There, insert the command
7136 \begin_layout Standard
7142 \begin_layout Standard
7147 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7151 \begin_layout Enumerate
7155 \begin_layout Enumerate
7159 \begin_layout Standard
7160 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7163 \begin_layout Enumerate
7164 \begin_inset Argument 1
7167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7183 This enumeration starts at 4
7186 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7188 \begin_inset Index idx
7191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7200 \begin_layout Standard
7201 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7203 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7206 \begin_layout Itemize
7210 \begin_layout Itemize
7211 with standard spacing
7214 \begin_layout Standard
7215 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7217 Add there the command
7221 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7224 \begin_layout Itemize
7225 \begin_inset Argument 1
7228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7247 \begin_layout Itemize
7251 \begin_layout Itemize
7255 \begin_layout Standard
7256 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7263 \begin_inset Index idx
7266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7274 For more information see its documentation,
7275 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7285 \begin_layout Standard
7286 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7288 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7289 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7290 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7293 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7296 \begin_layout Enumerate
7297 \begin_inset Argument 1
7300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7308 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7321 \begin_layout Enumerate
7322 with negative indentation
7325 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7326 Further Customization
7327 \begin_inset Index idx
7330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7331 Lists ! Customization
7339 \begin_layout Standard
7340 You can also change the style of description lists.
7344 \begin_layout Standard
7350 \begin_layout Standard
7351 changes the description label font, the command
7354 \begin_layout Standard
7360 \begin_layout Standard
7361 sets the list style.
7364 \begin_layout Standard
7365 An example where the command
7368 \begin_layout Standard
7373 itshape, style=nextline
7376 \begin_layout Standard
7380 \begin_layout Description
7382 \begin_inset space ~
7386 \begin_inset Argument 1
7389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7395 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7397 itshape, style=nextline
7407 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7408 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7412 \begin_layout Description
7414 \begin_inset space ~
7417 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7418 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7419 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7422 \begin_layout Standard
7423 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7429 \begin_inset Index idx
7432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7440 For more information see its documentation
7441 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7451 \begin_layout Subsection
7453 \begin_inset Index idx
7456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7465 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7467 \begin_inset space ~
7470 Address: An Overview
7473 \begin_layout Standard
7474 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7475 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7483 \begin_inset space ~
7489 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7490 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7491 gags on the document.
7492 In contrast, you can use the
7499 \begin_inset space ~
7504 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7505 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7509 \begin_layout Standard
7510 Of course, you're not limited to using
7517 \begin_inset space ~
7526 \begin_inset space ~
7531 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7532 some European academic papers.
7535 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7537 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7539 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7546 \begin_layout Standard
7551 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7552 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7556 \begin_inset space ~
7561 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7562 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7563 Here's an example of each:
7566 \begin_layout Right Address
7568 \begin_inset Newline newline
7572 \begin_inset Newline newline
7576 \begin_inset Newline newline
7579 When is it? What is today?
7582 \begin_layout Standard
7586 \begin_inset space ~
7592 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7594 the largest block of text on a single line.
7595 Here's an example of the
7602 \begin_layout Address
7604 \begin_inset Newline newline
7607 Where do I send this
7608 \begin_inset Newline newline
7611 Your post office and country
7614 \begin_layout Standard
7615 As you can see, both
7622 \begin_inset space ~
7627 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7632 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7633 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7639 This makes sense, since
7647 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7648 Thus, you have to use
7655 arg "newline-insert newline"
7660 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7661 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7663 \begin_inset space ~
7667 \begin_inset space ~
7672 ) to start a new line in an
7679 \begin_inset space ~
7687 \begin_layout Subsection
7691 \begin_layout Standard
7692 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7693 or list of references.
7695 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7698 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7700 \begin_inset Index idx
7703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7712 \begin_layout Standard
7717 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7718 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7719 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7720 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7734 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7735 The book document classes ignores the
7739 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7743 in a letter document class.
7746 \begin_layout Standard
7751 environment does several things for you.
7752 First, it puts the centered label
7753 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7757 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7761 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7763 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7764 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7765 the subsequent text.
7766 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7768 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7772 \begin_layout Standard
7773 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7777 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7778 The new paragraph will still be in the
7783 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7784 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7787 \begin_layout Standard
7788 \begin_inset Float figure
7793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7795 \begin_inset Graphics
7796 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7804 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7807 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7809 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7830 \begin_layout Standard
7831 We would love to demonstrate the
7835 environment, but since this document is in the
7836 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7840 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7843 class, we can't do this.
7844 We inserted it therefore as figure
7845 \begin_inset space ~
7849 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7851 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7856 If you have never heard of an
7857 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7861 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7864 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7867 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7869 \begin_inset Index idx
7872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7879 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7881 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
7888 \begin_layout Standard
7893 environment is used to list references.
7894 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7895 only use it at the end of the document.
7907 \begin_layout Standard
7908 When you first open a
7912 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
7913 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7914 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7918 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7922 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7926 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7929 depending on the document class.
7930 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7931 Each paragraph of the
7935 environment is a bibliography entry.
7940 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7941 Each new paragraph is still in the
7948 \begin_layout Standard
7949 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7950 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
7952 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
7954 handling, have a look at section
7955 \begin_inset space ~
7959 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7961 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7968 \begin_layout Subsection
7969 Special Environments
7972 \begin_layout Standard
7974 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
7975 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
7978 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7983 \begin_inset Index idx
7986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7994 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7996 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
8003 \begin_layout Standard
8009 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
8011 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
8016 key as a fixed whitespace.
8020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8033 \begin_inset space ~
8038 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8056 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8059 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8062 arg "newline-insert newline"
8079 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8080 So, when you finish using the
8085 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8086 Also, you can nest the
8091 environment inside of others.
8094 \begin_layout Standard
8095 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8098 \begin_layout Itemize
8102 arg "newline-insert newline"
8105 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8106 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8110 \begin_inset space \space{}
8120 arg "newline-insert newline"
8126 \begin_layout Itemize
8130 arg "newline-insert newline"
8140 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8146 \begin_layout Itemize
8147 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8148 You must put at least one
8152 in any line you want blank.
8153 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8157 \begin_layout Itemize
8158 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8162 since that will insert
8167 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8170 arg "self-insert \""
8176 \begin_layout Standard
8180 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8184 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8188 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8192 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8196 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8197 printf("Hello World!
8202 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8206 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8210 \begin_layout Standard
8211 This is just the standard
8212 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8216 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8223 \begin_layout Standard
8229 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8231 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8232 as if you used a typewriter.
8233 \begin_inset Index idx
8236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8237 Paragraph environments|)
8242 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8245 Program Code Listings
8250 \begin_inset space ~
8258 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8262 \begin_inset Index idx
8265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8274 \begin_layout Standard
8279 environment is similar to the
8284 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8285 computer console text.
8290 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8304 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8305 you can have empty lines.
8318 \begin_layout Itemize
8319 have a certain language and a text style
8322 \begin_layout Itemize
8323 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8324 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8325 and \SpecialChar TeX
8329 \begin_layout Standard
8330 Because of these properties
8334 works like a typewriter.
8338 \begin_layout Verbatim
8343 \begin_layout Verbatim
8347 The following 2 lines are empty:
8350 \begin_layout Verbatim
8354 \begin_layout Verbatim
8358 \begin_layout Verbatim
8360 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8365 \begin_layout Standard
8370 environment is identical to
8374 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8375 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8382 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8387 \begin_layout Section
8388 Nesting Environments
8389 \begin_inset Index idx
8392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8393 Nesting ! Environments
8399 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8408 \begin_layout Subsection
8412 \begin_layout Standard
8414 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8416 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8418 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8420 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8422 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8426 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8432 \begin_layout Enumerate
8436 \begin_layout Enumerate
8441 \begin_layout Enumerate
8445 \begin_layout Enumerate
8450 \begin_layout Enumerate
8454 \begin_layout Standard
8455 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8456 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8458 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8460 \begin_inset space ~
8464 \begin_inset space ~
8472 \begin_inset space ~
8476 \begin_inset space ~
8481 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8483 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8486 arg "depth-increment"
8492 arg "depth-decrement"
8506 arg "depth-increment"
8512 arg "depth-decrement"
8516 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8517 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8521 \begin_layout Standard
8522 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8523 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8524 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8525 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8526 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8529 \begin_layout Standard
8530 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8532 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8534 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8537 \begin_layout Subsection
8538 What You Can and Can't Nest
8541 \begin_layout Standard
8542 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8543 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8546 \begin_layout Standard
8547 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8548 than a simple yes or no.
8549 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8552 \begin_layout Itemize
8553 Completely unnestable
8556 \begin_layout Itemize
8557 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8561 \begin_layout Itemize
8562 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8566 \begin_layout Standard
8567 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8568 environments have them:
8571 \begin_layout Description
8572 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8573 Can't nest into them.
8577 \begin_layout Itemize
8583 \begin_layout Itemize
8589 \begin_layout Itemize
8595 \begin_layout Itemize
8601 \begin_layout Itemize
8608 \begin_layout Description
8610 \begin_inset space ~
8613 Nestable You can nest them.
8614 You can nest other things into them.
8618 \begin_layout Itemize
8624 \begin_layout Itemize
8630 \begin_layout Itemize
8636 \begin_layout Itemize
8642 \begin_layout Itemize
8648 \begin_layout Itemize
8654 \begin_layout Itemize
8660 \begin_layout Itemize
8667 \begin_layout Itemize
8673 \begin_layout Itemize
8680 \begin_layout Description
8681 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8682 You can't nest anything into them.
8686 \begin_layout Itemize
8692 \begin_layout Itemize
8698 \begin_layout Itemize
8704 \begin_layout Itemize
8710 \begin_layout Itemize
8716 \begin_layout Itemize
8722 \begin_layout Itemize
8728 \begin_layout Itemize
8734 \begin_layout Itemize
8740 \begin_layout Itemize
8746 \begin_layout Itemize
8752 \begin_layout Itemize
8758 \begin_layout Itemize
8764 \begin_layout Itemize
8768 \begin_inset space ~
8774 \begin_layout Itemize
8781 \begin_layout Standard
8782 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8790 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8800 \begin_inset space ~
8803 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8804 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8805 nested section headings violate this.
8813 \begin_layout Subsection
8814 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8815 \begin_inset Index idx
8818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8819 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8827 \begin_layout Standard
8828 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8829 affected by nesting anyhow.
8833 \begin_layout Itemize
8837 \begin_layout Itemize
8841 \begin_layout Itemize
8845 \begin_layout Standard
8847 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8855 Figures and tables in
8859 are not affected by this.
8864 Have a look at section
8865 \begin_inset space ~
8869 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8871 reference "sec:Floats"
8875 for more information about
8882 \begin_layout Standard
8884 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8885 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8889 \begin_layout Standard
8890 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8891 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8895 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8898 of its own, it behaves just like a
8899 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8903 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8906 paragraph environment.
8907 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8911 \begin_layout Standard
8912 Here's an example with a table:
8915 \begin_layout Enumerate
8920 \begin_layout Enumerate
8921 This is (a) and it's nested.
8925 \begin_layout Standard
8926 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8932 \begin_layout Standard
8934 \begin_inset Tabular
8935 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8936 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8937 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8938 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8940 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8958 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8978 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9022 \begin_layout Standard
9023 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9030 \begin_layout Enumerate
9032 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9036 \begin_layout Enumerate
9040 \begin_layout Standard
9041 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9044 \begin_layout Enumerate
9049 \begin_layout Enumerate
9050 This is (a) and it's nested.
9054 \begin_layout Standard
9055 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9061 \begin_layout Standard
9063 \begin_inset Tabular
9064 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9065 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9066 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9067 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9151 \begin_layout Standard
9152 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9158 \begin_layout Enumerate
9165 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9168 \begin_layout Enumerate
9172 \begin_layout Standard
9173 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9177 \begin_layout Standard
9178 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9181 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9184 \begin_layout Enumerate
9189 \begin_layout Enumerate
9190 This is (a) and it's nested.
9193 \begin_layout Standard
9194 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9200 \begin_layout Standard
9202 \begin_inset Tabular
9203 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9204 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9205 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9206 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9291 \begin_layout Standard
9292 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9298 \begin_layout Enumerate
9300 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9307 \begin_layout Enumerate
9311 \begin_layout Standard
9312 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9318 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9319 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9323 \begin_layout Subsection
9324 Usage and General Features
9327 \begin_layout Standard
9328 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9329 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9331 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9335 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9338 is the innermost possible depth.
9339 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9342 \begin_layout Enumerate
9343 level #1 – outermost
9347 \begin_layout Enumerate
9352 \begin_layout Enumerate
9357 \begin_layout Enumerate
9362 \begin_layout Itemize
9367 \begin_layout Itemize
9376 \begin_layout Standard
9377 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9378 both of them in the example.
9379 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9389 For example, if we tried to nest another
9394 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9398 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9401 , we would get errors.
9404 \begin_layout Subsection
9406 \begin_inset Index idx
9409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9418 \begin_layout Standard
9419 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9420 We have several examples of nested environments.
9421 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9425 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9426 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9429 \begin_layout Labeling
9430 \labelwidthstring MMM
9431 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9440 \begin_layout Labeling
9441 \labelwidthstring MMM
9442 #2-a This is level #2.
9443 We created it by using
9446 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9452 arg "depth-increment"
9459 \begin_layout Labeling
9460 \labelwidthstring MMM
9461 #3-a This is level #3.
9462 This time, we just enter
9469 arg "depth-increment"
9473 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9477 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9483 arg "depth-increment"
9490 \begin_layout Standard
9495 environment, nested inside of
9496 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9500 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9504 So, it's at level #4.
9505 We did this by entering
9508 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9514 arg "depth-increment"
9517 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9522 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9538 \begin_layout Standard
9543 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9546 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9552 \begin_layout Labeling
9553 \labelwidthstring MMM
9554 #4-a This is level #4.
9558 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9561 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9566 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9570 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9575 keep nesting things inside
9576 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9580 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9587 \begin_layout Labeling
9588 \labelwidthstring MMM
9589 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9594 \begin_layout Labeling
9595 \labelwidthstring MMM
9596 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9597 and this is level #6.
9598 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9602 \begin_layout Labeling
9603 \labelwidthstring MMM
9604 #5-b Back to level #5.
9608 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9614 arg "depth-decrement"
9621 \begin_layout Labeling
9622 \labelwidthstring MMM
9626 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9632 arg "depth-decrement"
9635 , we're back at level #4.
9639 \begin_layout Labeling
9640 \labelwidthstring MMM
9641 #3-b Back to level #3.
9642 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9646 \begin_layout Labeling
9647 \labelwidthstring MMM
9648 #2-b Back to level #2.
9653 \begin_layout Labeling
9654 \labelwidthstring MMM
9655 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9656 After this sentence, we will enter
9660 and change the paragraph environment back to
9667 \begin_layout Standard
9668 We could have also used the
9684 environment in place of the
9689 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9692 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9693 Example 2: Inheritance
9696 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9697 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9700 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9709 arg "depth-increment"
9713 \begin_inset Newline newline
9716 which, we will change to the
9724 \begin_layout Enumerate
9729 environment, at level #2.
9732 \begin_layout Enumerate
9733 Notice how the nested
9737 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9741 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9745 \begin_layout Standard
9746 We ended this example by entering
9751 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9755 and reset the nesting depth by using
9758 arg "depth-decrement"
9764 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9765 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9774 \begin_inset Argument 1
9777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9778 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9786 \begin_layout Enumerate
9787 This is level #1, in an
9791 paragraph environment.
9792 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9796 \begin_layout Enumerate
9801 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9807 arg "depth-increment"
9811 Now, what happens if we nest an
9815 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9816 label be? An asterisk?
9820 \begin_layout Itemize
9830 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9831 So, its label is a bullet.
9832 (We got here by using
9835 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9841 arg "depth-increment"
9844 , then changing the environment to
9852 \begin_layout Itemize
9853 Here's level #4, produced using
9856 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9862 arg "depth-increment"
9866 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
9871 \begin_layout Enumerate
9874 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9879 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9883 , because we are in the
9891 environment (that is, it is an
9906 \begin_layout Enumerate
9911 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9912 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
9916 \begin_layout Enumerate
9917 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9920 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9923 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9926 \begin_layout Enumerate
9930 arg "depth-decrement"
9933 to decrease the depth after the next
9936 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9943 \begin_layout Enumerate
9945 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
9950 \begin_layout Enumerate
9952 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9953 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
9957 \begin_layout Enumerate
9958 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9967 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
9972 reset the counter for the label.
9976 \begin_layout Enumerate
9980 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9986 arg "depth-decrement"
9989 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9990 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9991 into the twofold-nested
9999 \begin_layout Enumerate
10000 The same thing happens if we do another
10003 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10009 arg "depth-decrement"
10012 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
10015 \begin_layout Standard
10016 Lastly, we reset the environment to
10021 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10032 The number of other
10036 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10043 The same rule applies for the
10047 environment, as well.
10050 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10051 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10054 \begin_layout Enumerate
10055 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10056 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10057 the same detail with how we did it.
10066 \begin_layout Standard
10074 arg "depth-increment"
10081 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10082 the example in parentheses someplace.
10083 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10084 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10085 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10089 \begin_layout Enumerate
10094 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10098 \begin_layout Verse
10099 Now we will add verse.
10100 \begin_inset Newline newline
10103 It will get much worse.
10104 \begin_inset Newline newline
10114 arg "depth-increment"
10124 \begin_layout Verse
10125 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10126 \begin_inset Newline newline
10129 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10130 \begin_inset Newline newline
10136 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10144 \begin_layout Verse
10145 Here comes a table:
10149 \begin_layout Standard
10150 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10156 \begin_layout Standard
10158 \begin_inset Tabular
10159 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10160 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10161 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10162 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10247 \begin_layout Verse
10251 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10261 arg "depth-increment"
10267 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10273 \begin_inset Newline newline
10281 arg "depth-decrement"
10288 \begin_layout Enumerate
10293 : level #1) This is another item.
10294 Note that selecting a
10298 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10299 3 times to put the table inside the
10307 \begin_layout Quotation
10308 We're now ending the
10312 list and changing to
10317 We're still at level #1.
10318 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10319 The next set of paragraphs is a
10320 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10324 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10327 We will nest both the
10334 \begin_inset space ~
10339 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10343 for the letter body.
10347 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10350 to preserve the depth.
10351 Remember that you need to use
10354 arg "newline-insert newline"
10357 to create multiple lines inside the
10364 \begin_inset space ~
10374 \begin_layout Right Address
10376 \begin_inset Newline newline
10379 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10380 \begin_inset Newline newline
10386 \begin_layout Address
10388 \begin_inset space ~
10394 \begin_layout Quotation
10395 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10396 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10399 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10400 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10401 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10402 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10403 as soon as possible.
10404 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10407 \begin_layout Quotation
10408 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10409 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10410 with your order, along with payment.
10413 \begin_layout Quotation
10414 We thank you again for your patience.
10417 \begin_layout Address
10419 \begin_inset Newline newline
10426 \begin_layout Quotation
10427 That ends that example!
10430 \begin_layout Standard
10431 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10432 gives you a lot of power with just
10434 We could have easily nested an
10455 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10458 \begin_layout Subsection
10460 \begin_inset Index idx
10463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10464 Nesting ! Separation
10470 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10472 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10479 \begin_layout Standard
10480 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10482 For example you need two different enumerations:
10485 \begin_layout Enumerate
10490 \begin_layout Enumerate
10495 \begin_layout Enumerate
10499 \begin_layout Standard
10500 \begin_inset Separator plain
10506 \begin_layout Itemize
10512 \begin_layout Standard
10513 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10519 \begin_layout Enumerate
10523 \begin_layout Enumerate
10527 \begin_layout Enumerate
10531 \begin_layout Standard
10532 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10533 list item and use the menu
10535 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10536 Start New Environment
10539 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
10540 ) and behind it the new list.
10543 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10544 Start New Parent Environment
10546 only appears if the item is nested.
10547 It does not only separate the list but also creates a new one outside the
10551 \begin_layout Standard
10552 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
10553 (red arrow in LyX).
10554 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10555 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10558 \begin_layout Standard
10559 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10562 arg "paragraph-break"
10569 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10572 \begin_layout Section
10573 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10574 \begin_inset Index idx
10577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10586 \begin_layout Standard
10587 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10588 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10590 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10591 be broken at the end of a line.
10592 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10596 \begin_layout Subsection
10598 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10600 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10605 \begin_inset Index idx
10608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10617 \begin_layout Standard
10618 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10619 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10620 ) not to break the line at
10622 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10625 \begin_layout Quote
10626 Further documentation is given in section
10627 \begin_inset Newline newline
10631 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10633 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10641 \begin_layout Standard
10642 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10643 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10647 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10651 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10655 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10657 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10662 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10666 A protected space is set with
10668 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10669 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10671 \begin_inset space ~
10679 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10685 \begin_layout Subsection
10687 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10689 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10694 \begin_inset Index idx
10697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10698 Spacing ! Horizontal
10706 \begin_layout Standard
10707 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10709 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10710 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10714 The length units are listed in Appendix
10715 \begin_inset space ~
10719 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10721 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10728 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10730 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10732 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10737 \begin_inset Index idx
10740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10741 Spaces ! Inter-word
10749 \begin_layout Standard
10750 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10751 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10752 at the ends of sentences.
10753 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
10754 automatically takes care about this.
10755 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10756 followed by a period; see section
10757 \begin_inset space ~
10761 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10763 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10768 To insert a normal space, select
10770 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10771 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10773 \begin_inset space ~
10781 arg "space-insert normal"
10787 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10789 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10791 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10796 \begin_inset Index idx
10799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10808 \begin_layout Standard
10810 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10814 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10817 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10818 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10822 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10826 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10827 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10828 inside abbreviations:
10831 \begin_layout Quote
10833 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10837 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10840 \begin_layout Standard
10841 or between values and units.
10842 Compare for example this:
10843 \begin_inset Newline newline
10847 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10851 \begin_inset Newline newline
10854 10 kg (normal space
10857 \begin_layout Standard
10858 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10860 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10861 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10863 \begin_inset space ~
10871 arg "space-insert thin"
10877 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10881 \begin_layout Standard
10882 You can also insert the following space types:
10885 \begin_layout Description
10887 \begin_inset space ~
10891 \begin_inset space ~
10894 space A line with a
10895 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10899 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10903 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10906 negative thin space between the arrows.
10909 \begin_layout Description
10911 \begin_inset space ~
10915 \begin_inset space ~
10918 space A line with a
10919 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10923 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
10927 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10930 negative medium space between the arrows.
10933 \begin_layout Description
10935 \begin_inset space ~
10939 \begin_inset space ~
10942 space A line with a
10943 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10947 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
10951 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10954 negative thick space between the arrows.
10957 \begin_layout Description
10959 \begin_inset space ~
10963 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10967 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10971 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10975 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10979 \begin_inset space ~
10983 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10986 em) space between the arrows.
10989 \begin_layout Description
10991 \begin_inset space ~
10995 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10999 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11003 \begin_inset space \quad{}
11007 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11011 \begin_inset space ~
11015 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11018 em) space between the arrows.
11021 \begin_layout Description
11023 \begin_inset space ~
11027 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11031 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11035 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11039 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11043 \begin_inset space ~
11047 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11050 em) space between the arrows.
11053 \begin_layout Description
11055 \begin_inset space ~
11059 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11063 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11068 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11072 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11075 cm space between the arrows.
11078 \begin_layout Standard
11080 \begin_inset space ~
11084 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11086 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11090 lists the different space sizes.
11093 \begin_layout Standard
11094 \begin_inset Float table
11099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11100 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11103 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11105 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11109 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11119 \begin_inset Tabular
11120 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
11121 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11122 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11123 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11136 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11149 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11158 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11163 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11187 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11197 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11206 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11211 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11221 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11230 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11235 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11239 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11243 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11267 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11277 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11286 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11291 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11301 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11306 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11319 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11329 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11334 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11342 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11347 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11362 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11370 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11375 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11396 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11398 \begin_inset Index idx
11401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11410 \begin_layout Standard
11411 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11412 feature for adding extra space
11413 in a uniform fashion.
11414 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11415 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11416 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11417 equally between themselves.
11420 \begin_layout Standard
11421 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11424 \begin_layout Quote
11426 This is on the left side
11427 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11430 This is on the right
11433 \begin_layout Quote
11436 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11440 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11446 \begin_layout Quote
11449 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11453 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11457 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11463 \begin_layout Standard
11464 That was an example in the
11470 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11474 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11478 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11481 is one in a standard paragraph.
11482 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11486 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11489 \begin_layout Standard
11490 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11493 \begin_inset space ~
11498 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11501 \begin_layout Standard
11503 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11507 \begin_inset space ~
11513 \begin_layout Standard
11515 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11519 \begin_inset space ~
11525 \begin_layout Standard
11527 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11531 \begin_inset space ~
11537 \begin_layout Standard
11539 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11543 \begin_inset space ~
11549 \begin_layout Standard
11551 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11555 \begin_inset space ~
11561 \begin_layout Standard
11563 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11567 \begin_inset space ~
11573 \begin_layout Standard
11574 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11582 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11586 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11588 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11589 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11593 option in the space dialog.
11601 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11603 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11605 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11610 \begin_inset Index idx
11613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11622 \begin_layout Standard
11623 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11624 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11627 \begin_layout Standard
11628 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11631 What is correct English?:
11632 \begin_inset Newline newline
11636 \begin_inset Newline newline
11640 \begin_inset space ~
11643 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11644 \begin_inset Newline newline
11648 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11659 \begin_inset Newline newline
11663 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11674 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11680 \begin_layout Standard
11682 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11683 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11687 \begin_inset space ~
11691 \begin_inset space ~
11695 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11699 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11701 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11702 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11706 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11708 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11712 \begin_inset space ~
11716 \begin_inset space ~
11720 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11723 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11724 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11728 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11732 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11733 That is why it is named
11734 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11738 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11742 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11743 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11747 \begin_layout Subsection
11749 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11751 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
11756 \begin_inset Index idx
11759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11768 \begin_layout Standard
11769 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11771 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11772 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11774 \begin_inset space ~
11780 There you find the following sizes:
11783 \begin_layout Standard
11796 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
11797 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11802 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11804 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11805 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
11807 \begin_inset space ~
11813 \begin_inset Index idx
11816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11817 Document ! Settings
11822 for the paragraph separation.
11823 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11834 \begin_layout Standard
11840 \begin_inset Index idx
11843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11849 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11850 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11855 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11856 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11865 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11874 s are described in section
11875 \begin_inset space ~
11879 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11881 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11890 If there are several
11894 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11895 You can therefore use
11899 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11902 \begin_layout Standard
11907 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11908 \begin_inset space ~
11912 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11914 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11921 \begin_layout Standard
11922 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11932 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11933 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11945 \begin_layout Subsection
11946 Paragraph Alignment
11947 \begin_inset Index idx
11950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11951 Paragraph ! Alignment
11959 \begin_layout Standard
11960 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11962 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
11965 dialog (toolbar button
11968 arg "layout-paragraph"
11972 There are five possibilities:
11975 \begin_layout Itemize
11983 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11989 \begin_layout Itemize
11997 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
12003 \begin_layout Itemize
12011 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
12017 \begin_layout Itemize
12025 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12031 \begin_layout Itemize
12039 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12045 \begin_layout Standard
12046 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12047 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12048 the left and right margins.
12049 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12052 \begin_layout Standard
12054 This paragraph is right aligned,
12057 \begin_layout Standard
12059 this one is centered,
12062 \begin_layout Standard
12064 this one is left aligned.
12067 \begin_layout Subsection
12069 \begin_inset Index idx
12072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12073 Page breaks ! Forced
12079 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12081 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12088 \begin_layout Standard
12089 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12090 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12091 force a page break where you want one.
12092 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12093 is good at page breaking.
12094 Only if you use a lot of
12098 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12099 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12102 \begin_layout Standard
12103 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12104 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12108 have to change the page breaking.
12111 \begin_layout Standard
12112 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12114 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12116 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12117 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12119 \begin_inset space ~
12125 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12127 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12128 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12130 \begin_inset space ~
12135 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12137 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12138 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12141 \begin_layout Standard
12142 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12143 at the top of a page.
12144 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12146 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12147 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12148 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12150 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12152 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12156 to learn more about
12163 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12165 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12167 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12172 \begin_inset Index idx
12175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12176 Page breaks ! Clear
12184 \begin_layout Standard
12185 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12186 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12187 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12188 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12189 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12192 \begin_layout Standard
12193 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12195 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12196 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12198 \begin_inset space ~
12204 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12206 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12207 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12209 \begin_inset space ~
12213 \begin_inset space ~
12218 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12219 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12222 \begin_layout Subsection
12224 \begin_inset Index idx
12227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12234 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12236 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12243 \begin_layout Standard
12244 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12246 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12248 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12249 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12251 \begin_inset space ~
12255 \begin_inset space ~
12263 arg "newline-insert newline"
12267 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12269 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12270 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12272 \begin_inset space ~
12276 \begin_inset space ~
12284 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12287 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12289 This is useful to avoid
12290 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12294 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12297 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12300 \begin_layout Standard
12301 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12302 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12304 very good at line breaking.
12305 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to set
12306 a line break actively, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12307 \begin_inset space ~
12311 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12313 reference "sec:Quote"
12318 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12320 reference "sec:Verse"
12325 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12327 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12334 \begin_layout Subsection
12336 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12338 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12343 \begin_inset Index idx
12346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12355 \begin_layout Standard
12357 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12368 \begin_layout Standard
12372 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12373 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12375 \begin_inset space ~
12380 you can insert horizontal lines.
12381 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12382 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12383 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12386 \begin_layout Standard
12388 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12399 \begin_layout Section
12400 Characters and Symbols
12403 \begin_layout Standard
12404 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12405 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12406 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12408 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12412 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12414 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12418 for information on how this is done.
12421 \begin_layout Standard
12422 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12427 dialog via the menu
12429 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12430 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12436 \begin_layout Standard
12437 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12445 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12446 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12448 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12456 \begin_layout Section
12457 Fonts and Text Styles
12458 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12460 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12467 \begin_layout Subsection
12469 \begin_inset Index idx
12472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12481 \begin_layout Standard
12482 There are two types of fonts:
12485 \begin_layout Description
12487 \begin_inset space ~
12491 \begin_inset Index idx
12494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12500 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12501 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12505 characters) in the font.
12506 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12507 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12508 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12509 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12510 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12511 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12512 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12513 \begin_inset Newline newline
12516 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12517 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12518 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12519 sizes than at small ones.
12520 \begin_inset Newline newline
12534 \begin_inset space ~
12542 \begin_layout Description
12544 \begin_inset space ~
12548 \begin_inset Index idx
12551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12557 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12558 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12559 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12560 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12561 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12562 image manipulation program.
12563 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12564 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12565 \begin_inset space ~
12568 pixels high up to 34
12569 \begin_inset space ~
12572 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12573 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12574 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12576 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12577 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12578 \begin_inset Newline newline
12581 Bitmap fonts are named
12584 \begin_inset space ~
12589 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12592 \begin_layout Standard
12593 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12594 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12595 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12596 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12597 use scalable fonts.
12600 \begin_layout Standard
12601 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12604 \begin_layout Standard
12605 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12606 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12607 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12608 font to emphasize text, you use an
12609 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12613 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12617 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12619 In \SpecialChar LyX
12620 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12624 \begin_layout Subsection
12627 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12629 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12636 \begin_layout Standard
12637 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12638 used its own fonts.
12639 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12640 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12643 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12644 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12645 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12646 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12647 to a word processor.
12648 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12649 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12650 files are very portable across
12651 different machines.
12652 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12653 has increased a lot
12654 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12657 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12659 \begin_inset space ~
12663 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12665 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12670 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
12671 code in the document
12672 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12675 \begin_layout Standard
12676 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12677 engines that are also able directly
12678 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12680 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12682 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12684 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12685 that is installed on your system.
12686 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12689 \begin_layout Standard
12690 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12698 In practice, some fonts might fail due to a legacy (non Unicode) font encoding,
12699 bad metrics, or other font deficiencies; so you might have to experiment.
12707 \begin_layout Subsection
12708 Document Font and Font size
12709 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12711 name "subsec:Document-Font"
12716 \begin_inset Index idx
12719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12726 \begin_inset Index idx
12729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12738 \begin_layout Standard
12739 You can set the document fonts in the
12741 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12745 \begin_inset Index idx
12748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12749 Document ! Settings
12759 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12760 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12763 \begin_inset space ~
12772 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12774 \begin_inset space ~
12777 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12780 \begin_layout Standard
12785 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12786 This requires that you use
12798 as the output format, i.
12799 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12803 \begin_inset space \space{}
12806 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12807 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12808 installed (see section
12809 \begin_inset space ~
12813 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12815 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12820 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
12822 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
12823 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
12825 \begin_inset space ~
12828 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
12829 cannot determine the family.
12830 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12831 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
12834 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12837 \begin_layout Standard
12838 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
12839 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
12844 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12850 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12851 With LyX's default font encoding, this is a look-alike of the standard
12854 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12860 \begin_inset space ~
12866 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12874 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12882 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12886 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12891 European Computer Modern
12894 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12902 However, some classes set different default fonts.
12905 \begin_layout Standard
12910 is a bitmap font, it looks pixelated in PDF output, especially when you
12911 read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12916 This problem is less severe if you read PDFs in
12919 \begin_inset space ~
12924 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12930 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12931 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12934 \begin_layout Itemize
12938 \begin_inset space ~
12943 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12956 \begin_inset space ~
12961 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
12962 community in order to replace
12966 as the default font.
12967 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12968 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12971 \begin_inset space ~
12984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12985 One difference is improved kerning.
12993 \begin_layout Itemize
12994 If you do not like the look of
13002 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
13003 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13007 \begin_inset space ~
13013 \begin_inset space ~
13023 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13024 \begin_inset space ~
13027 serif and typewriter fonts,
13031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13032 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13033 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13039 \begin_inset space ~
13048 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13049 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13053 \begin_inset space \space{}
13061 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13065 \begin_inset space \space{}
13071 \begin_inset space ~
13079 \begin_inset space ~
13089 but you can also select your own.
13090 \begin_inset Newline newline
13093 The differences between roman,
13096 \begin_inset space ~
13105 fonts are explained in section
13106 \begin_inset space ~
13110 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13112 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13117 \begin_inset Newline newline
13123 \begin_inset space ~
13128 was originally designed for newspapers.
13129 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13130 into the small newspaper columns.
13134 \begin_inset space ~
13139 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13142 \begin_layout Standard
13143 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13156 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13161 depends on the class you are using.
13162 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13165 \begin_layout Standard
13166 Note that the font size is the
13171 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13172 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13173 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13174 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13177 \begin_inset space ~
13183 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13184 \begin_inset space ~
13188 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13190 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13197 \begin_layout Standard
13201 \begin_inset space ~
13206 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13208 \begin_inset space ~
13211 serif or typewriter.
13216 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13226 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13229 \begin_layout Standard
13234 LaTeX font encoding
13236 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13237 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13243 \begin_inset Index idx
13246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13254 \begin_inset space ~
13258 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13260 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13265 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13266 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13273 \begin_layout Standard
13274 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13276 Use Old Style Figures
13280 Use True Small Caps
13283 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13286 Use Old Style Figures
13288 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13290 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13291 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13295 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13298 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13302 Use True Small Caps
13304 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13305 of scaled capitals.
13306 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13307 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13310 \begin_layout Standard
13315 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13316 a font to display the script characters.
13320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13321 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13327 \begin_inset Index idx
13330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13337 So this has no effect for the document language
13351 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13355 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13363 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13368 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13369 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13371 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13373 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13376 dialog, see section
13377 \begin_inset space ~
13381 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13383 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13395 \begin_layout Subsection
13399 \begin_layout Standard
13400 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13401 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13403 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13404 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13405 choose a math font in the dialog
13407 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13411 \begin_inset Index idx
13414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13415 Document ! Settings
13421 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13422 automatically selects a math font.
13423 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13424 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13427 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13433 \begin_inset space ~
13439 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13444 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
13445 document font is available.
13448 \begin_layout Standard
13449 Note that the math font will not be used for
13453 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13459 or by the insertion of the command
13466 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13467 \begin_inset space ~
13471 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13472 while the math characters do not.
13474 \begin_inset space ~
13477 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13480 \begin_inset space ~
13488 \begin_inset space ~
13493 in the document font settings.
13496 \begin_layout Standard
13497 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
13498 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
13499 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
13500 font (in most cases
13501 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13507 \begin_inset space ~
13513 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13516 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
13517 variant of the document's class default font (in most
13519 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13525 \begin_inset space ~
13531 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13537 \begin_layout Subsection
13538 Using Different Character Styles
13539 \begin_inset Index idx
13542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13549 \begin_inset Index idx
13552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13561 \begin_layout Standard
13562 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
13563 automatically changes the character style for certain
13564 paragraph environments.
13566 supports two character styles,
13575 You can activate both of these styles via key bindings, the menus, and
13579 \begin_layout Standard
13584 style, do one of the following:
13587 \begin_layout Itemize
13588 click on the toolbar button
13597 \begin_layout Itemize
13598 use the key binding
13607 \begin_layout Standard
13608 These commands are all toggles.
13613 style is already active, they deactivate it.
13616 \begin_layout Standard
13617 One typically uses the
13621 style for proper names.
13623 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13630 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
13632 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13638 \begin_layout Standard
13639 A more widely used character style is the
13644 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
13651 \begin_layout Itemize
13652 clicking on the toolbar button
13661 \begin_layout Itemize
13662 using the keybindings
13671 \begin_layout Standard
13676 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13678 use a different font.
13681 \begin_layout Standard
13682 We've been using the
13686 style all over the place in this document.
13687 Here's one more example:
13690 \begin_layout Quotation
13693 Do not overuse character styles!
13696 \begin_layout Standard
13697 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
13698 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
13699 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
13700 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
13704 \begin_layout Standard
13705 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
13713 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13715 \begin_inset space ~
13718 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13724 arg "dialog-show character"
13730 \begin_layout Subsection
13731 Fine-Tuning with the
13736 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13738 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13743 \begin_inset Index idx
13746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13755 \begin_layout Standard
13756 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
13758 gives you a way to create a custom character style.
13759 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
13760 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
13761 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
13762 from ordinary dialog.
13765 \begin_layout Standard
13766 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
13767 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
13768 \begin_inset Newline newline
13771 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
13772 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
13775 \begin_layout Standard
13776 To use custom character styles, open the
13778 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13780 \begin_inset space ~
13783 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13786 dialog or press the toolbar button
13789 arg "dialog-show character"
13793 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
13794 font property that you can choose.
13795 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
13798 \begin_inset space ~
13803 , which keeps the current state of that property.
13808 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
13809 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
13810 environments all at once.
13813 \begin_layout Standard
13814 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
13817 \begin_inset space ~
13829 \begin_layout Labeling
13830 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13836 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13840 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13844 The possible options are:
13848 \begin_layout Labeling
13849 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13854 This is the Roman font family.
13855 Normally a serif font.
13856 It's also the default family.
13866 \begin_layout Labeling
13867 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13871 \begin_inset space ~
13878 This is the Sans Serif font family.
13890 \begin_layout Labeling
13891 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13898 This is the Typewriter font family.
13904 arg "font-typewriter"
13913 \begin_layout Labeling
13914 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13919 This corresponds to the print weight.
13924 \begin_layout Labeling
13925 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13930 This is the Medium font series.
13931 It's also the default series.
13934 \begin_layout Labeling
13935 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13942 This is the Bold font series.
13955 \begin_layout Labeling
13956 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13961 As the name implies.
13966 \begin_layout Labeling
13967 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13972 This is the Upright font shape.
13973 It's also the default shape.
13976 \begin_layout Labeling
13977 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13991 s the Italic font shape
13997 \begin_layout Labeling
13998 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14005 This is the Slanted font shape
14007 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
14008 , this is different from italic).
14011 \begin_layout Labeling
14012 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14016 \begin_inset space ~
14023 This is the Small caps font shape
14030 \begin_layout Labeling
14031 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14036 Alters the text color.
14037 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
14041 \begin_inset space ~
14046 , which means that the document default color set in
14048 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14049 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
14055 \begin_inset space ~
14060 is used, you can choose between
14137 \begin_inset Index idx
14140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14149 \begin_layout Labeling
14150 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14155 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
14156 the language of the document.
14157 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
14158 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
14160 \begin_inset Newline newline
14163 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
14165 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
14166 When using the spell checking (see section
14167 \begin_inset space ~
14171 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14173 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
14177 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
14180 \begin_layout Labeling
14181 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14186 Alters the size of the font.
14187 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
14188 proportional to the document font size.
14189 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
14190 the details, but a general description of what
14196 \begin_layout Labeling
14197 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14205 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14209 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14218 arg "font-size tiny"
14224 \begin_layout Labeling
14225 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14233 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14237 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14246 arg "font-size scriptsize"
14252 \begin_layout Labeling
14253 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14261 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14265 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14274 arg "font-size footnotesize"
14280 \begin_layout Labeling
14281 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14289 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14293 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14302 arg "font-size small"
14308 \begin_layout Labeling
14309 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14315 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14319 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14323 It's also the default size.
14327 arg "font-size normal"
14333 \begin_layout Labeling
14334 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14342 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14346 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14355 arg "font-size large"
14361 \begin_layout Labeling
14362 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14370 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14374 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14383 arg "font-size larger"
14389 \begin_layout Labeling
14390 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14398 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14402 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14411 arg "font-size largest"
14417 \begin_layout Labeling
14418 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14426 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14430 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14439 arg "font-size huge"
14445 \begin_layout Labeling
14446 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14454 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14458 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14467 arg "font-size giant"
14473 \begin_layout Labeling
14474 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14479 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
14480 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14484 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14488 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14492 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14499 arg "font-size increase"
14505 \begin_layout Labeling
14506 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14511 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
14512 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14516 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14520 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14524 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14531 arg "font-size decrease"
14538 \begin_layout Standard
14543 : don't go crazy with this feature.
14544 You should almost never need to change the font size.
14546 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
14547 — use those instead.
14548 This is here for fine-tuning only!
14551 \begin_layout Labeling
14552 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14557 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
14562 \begin_layout Labeling
14563 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14570 This is text with emphasize on
14573 This might seem like the same as
14577 , but it is actually a bit different.
14583 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
14585 Normally this font is equal to italic.
14588 \begin_layout Labeling
14589 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14596 This is text with Underbar on.
14602 arg "font-underline"
14608 \begin_inset Newline newline
14613 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
14614 when you could not change fonts.
14615 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
14616 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
14617 because some people
14621 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
14624 \begin_layout Labeling
14625 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14629 \begin_inset space ~
14636 This is text with Double underbar on.
14642 arg "font-underunderline"
14646 \begin_inset Newline newline
14649 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
14650 about double underbar.
14653 \begin_layout Labeling
14654 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14658 \begin_inset space ~
14665 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
14671 arg "font-underwave"
14675 \begin_inset Newline newline
14678 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
14679 Keep antinausea pills handy.
14682 \begin_layout Labeling
14683 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14687 \begin_inset space ~
14694 This is text with Strikeout on.
14700 arg "font-strikeout"
14704 \begin_inset Newline newline
14707 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
14708 changed in the meantime.
14711 \begin_layout Labeling
14712 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14716 \begin_inset space ~
14723 This is text with Cross out on.
14726 \begin_inset Newline newline
14729 This is used to make text hardly readable.
14732 \begin_layout Labeling
14733 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14740 This is text with Noun on.
14747 , this is a logical attribute.
14748 Normally it's equivalent to
14751 \begin_inset space ~
14760 \begin_layout Standard
14761 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
14762 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
14764 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14766 \begin_inset space ~
14769 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14775 arg "dialog-show character"
14778 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
14779 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
14782 arg "textstyle-apply"
14786 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
14790 \begin_layout Standard
14791 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
14798 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
14799 (suppose you just set the shape to
14800 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14804 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14808 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14812 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14818 \begin_inset space ~
14830 \begin_layout Standard
14831 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
14839 \begin_inset space ~
14851 \begin_layout Itemize
14857 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14861 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14864 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14865 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14869 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14873 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14877 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14882 \begin_inset Newline newline
14886 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14900 \begin_inset Note Note
14903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14904 For more on phantoms see section
14905 \begin_inset space ~
14909 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14911 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
14921 \begin_inset Newline newline
14927 \begin_layout Itemize
14932 fonts use characters with serifs.
14933 These are the small
14934 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14938 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14941 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
14942 The following example shows the difference:
14943 \begin_inset Newline newline
14947 \begin_inset Newline newline
14952 text without serifs
14955 \begin_inset Newline newline
14958 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
14959 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
14966 \begin_layout Itemize
14971 is not recommended for use as a base type.
14972 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
14973 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
14976 \begin_layout Standard
14977 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14981 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14984 refers to applying or removing font properties.
14985 When a property is marked for toggling in the
14988 \begin_inset space ~
14993 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
14994 the property to be removed.
14995 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
14996 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
14997 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
15000 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15004 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15008 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15012 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15015 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
15016 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
15017 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15021 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15024 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
15028 \begin_inset space ~
15033 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
15036 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15040 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15044 If you, for example, set
15045 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15049 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15053 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15057 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15063 \begin_inset space ~
15068 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
15070 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15074 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15077 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
15080 \begin_layout Standard
15081 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
15082 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
15085 \begin_layout Section
15086 Printing and Previewing
15089 \begin_layout Subsection
15093 \begin_layout Standard
15094 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
15095 using \SpecialChar LyX
15096 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
15097 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
15098 goes on behind-the-scenes.
15099 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
15101 Additional Features
15106 \begin_layout Standard
15108 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
15111 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
15112 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
15113 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
15116 is what you use to do your actual writing.
15117 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
15118 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15119 to turn your writing into printable output.
15120 This happens in two stages:
15123 \begin_layout Enumerate
15124 First, \SpecialChar LyX
15125 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
15127 a file with the extension,
15128 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15136 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15142 \begin_layout Enumerate
15143 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
15144 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15145 to use the commands in the
15149 file to produce printable output.
15152 \begin_layout Subsection
15153 Output file formats
15154 \begin_inset Index idx
15157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15164 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15166 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
15173 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15174 Simple text (ASCII)
15175 \begin_inset Index idx
15178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15179 File formats ! ASCII
15187 \begin_layout Standard
15188 This file type has the extension
15189 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15197 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15201 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
15202 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15205 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
15206 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15212 \begin_layout Standard
15213 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
15215 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15216 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15218 \begin_inset space ~
15224 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
15225 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
15226 bibliography (section
15227 \begin_inset space ~
15231 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15233 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
15238 If your document includes such material, use
15240 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15241 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15243 \begin_inset space ~
15247 \begin_inset space ~
15251 \begin_inset space ~
15259 \begin_inset space ~
15263 \begin_inset space ~
15269 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
15270 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
15273 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15276 \begin_inset Index idx
15279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15280 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
15289 \begin_layout Standard
15290 This file type has the extension
15291 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15299 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15302 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15305 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
15306 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
15307 -Errors or to process it manually
15308 with console commands.
15309 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
15310 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
15311 's temporary directory whenever you
15312 view or export your document.
15315 \begin_layout Standard
15316 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
15317 -file using the menu
15319 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15320 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15324 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
15325 export variants are explained in section
15326 \begin_inset space ~
15330 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15332 reference "subsec:Export"
15339 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15341 \begin_inset Index idx
15344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15353 \begin_layout Standard
15354 This file type has the extension
15355 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15363 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15368 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15372 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15375 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
15376 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
15377 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
15381 \begin_layout Standard
15382 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
15383 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
15384 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
15385 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
15386 when you view the DVI.
15387 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
15390 \begin_layout Standard
15391 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
15393 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15394 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15399 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15400 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15402 \begin_inset space ~
15408 The latter option uses the program
15410 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15416 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15419 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15420 font access (see section
15421 \begin_inset space ~
15425 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15427 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15432 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15433 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15438 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15440 \begin_inset Index idx
15443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15444 File formats ! PostScript
15452 \begin_layout Standard
15453 This file type has the extension
15454 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15462 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15466 PostScript was developed by the company
15470 as a printer language.
15471 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
15473 PostScript can be seen as a
15474 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15477 programming language
15478 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15481 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
15485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15486 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15493 \begin_inset Index idx
15496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15498 packages ! pstricks
15508 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
15511 \begin_layout Standard
15512 PostScript can only contain images in the format
15513 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15516 Encapsulated PostScript
15517 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15520 (EPS, file extension
15521 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15529 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15533 As \SpecialChar LyX
15534 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
15535 convert them in the background to EPS.
15536 If, for example, you have 50
15537 \begin_inset space ~
15540 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
15542 \begin_inset space ~
15545 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
15546 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
15548 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
15549 EPS to avoid this problem.
15552 \begin_layout Standard
15553 You can export to PostScript using the menu
15555 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15556 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15562 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15564 \begin_inset Index idx
15567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15574 \begin_inset Index idx
15577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15586 \begin_layout Standard
15587 This file type has the extension
15588 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15596 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15601 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15604 Portable Document Format
15605 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15612 was derived from PostScript.
15613 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
15615 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15619 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15622 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
15623 looks exactly the same.
15626 \begin_layout Standard
15627 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
15628 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15631 Joint Photographic Experts Group
15632 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15635 (JPG, file extension
15636 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15644 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15648 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15656 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15660 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15663 Portable Network Graphics
15664 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15667 (PNG, file extension
15668 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15676 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15680 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
15681 converts them in the
15682 background to one of these formats.
15683 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
15684 will slow down your workflow.
15685 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
15688 \begin_layout Standard
15689 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
15691 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15697 \begin_layout Description
15699 \begin_inset space ~
15702 (pdflatex) This uses the program
15706 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15709 \begin_layout Description
15711 \begin_inset space ~
15718 ) This uses the program
15720 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15723 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15726 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15729 is a new engine, derived from
15733 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
15734 access (see section
15735 \begin_inset space ~
15739 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15741 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15746 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15747 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15752 \begin_layout Description
15754 \begin_inset space ~
15761 ) This uses the program
15766 that converts your file directly to PDF.
15772 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15773 font access (see section
15774 \begin_inset space ~
15778 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15780 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15785 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
15786 vertically written Japanese.
15789 \begin_layout Description
15791 \begin_inset space ~
15794 (cropped) This is the same as
15797 \begin_inset space ~
15802 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
15803 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
15804 to generate good-looking
15805 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
15808 \begin_layout Description
15810 \begin_inset space ~
15813 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
15817 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
15821 \begin_layout Description
15823 \begin_inset space ~
15826 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
15830 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
15831 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
15835 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
15836 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
15839 \begin_layout Standard
15843 \begin_inset space ~
15852 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
15853 works without problems.
15854 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
15855 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
15859 \begin_inset space ~
15867 \begin_inset space ~
15872 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
15880 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15882 \begin_inset Index idx
15885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15886 FileFormats ! XHTML
15892 \begin_inset Index idx
15895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15904 \begin_layout Standard
15905 This file type has the extension
15906 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15914 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15918 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
15919 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
15920 When \SpecialChar LyX
15921 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
15922 suitable for the purpose.
15923 For the math output you can choose in the menu
15925 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15926 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
15929 between different formats, which are described in section
15931 Math Output in XHTML
15936 \begin_inset space ~
15944 \begin_layout Standard
15945 XHTML output remains
15946 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15950 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15953 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
15954 features are supported yet.
15958 and the World Wide Web
15962 Additional Features
15964 manual, for more information.
15967 \begin_layout Standard
15968 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
15970 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15971 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15977 \begin_layout Subsection
15979 \begin_inset Index idx
15982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15991 \begin_layout Standard
15992 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
15993 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
16002 or use the toolbar button
16009 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
16010 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
16011 \begin_inset space ~
16015 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16017 reference "sec:File-Formats"
16021 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
16023 \begin_inset space ~
16027 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16029 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
16034 Further output formats can be selected via
16036 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16037 View (Other Formats)
16039 or the toolbar button
16048 \begin_layout Standard
16049 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
16050 viewer window using the menu
16052 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16057 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16058 Update (Other Formats)
16063 \begin_layout Standard
16064 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
16067 To have a real output, export your document.
16070 \begin_layout Section
16071 A few Words about Typography
16072 \begin_inset Index idx
16075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16084 \begin_layout Subsection
16085 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
16086 \begin_inset Index idx
16089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16096 \begin_inset Index idx
16099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16108 \begin_layout Standard
16109 In \SpecialChar LyX
16111 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16119 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16122 symbol comes in four variants: the
16139 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16145 \begin_layout Standard
16146 \begin_inset Box Frameless
16156 height_special "totalheight"
16161 backgroundcolor "none"
16164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16165 \begin_inset Tabular
16166 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
16167 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
16168 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
16169 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16170 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16171 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16172 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16200 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16201 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16219 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16223 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16231 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16240 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16241 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16263 system key combination
16267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16268 On Mac and Linux, the en dash is entered with
16271 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16275 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16280 and the em dash with
16283 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16287 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16296 is the Mac label for the right
16305 Alternatively, dashes can be inserted with
16307 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16309 \begin_inset space ~
16312 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16316 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16320 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16324 function with the Unicode code point as argument (2013 for the em dash
16325 and 2014 for the en dash).
16331 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16335 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16344 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16345 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16367 system key combination or
16368 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16372 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16382 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16395 \begin_inset Formula $-$
16403 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16407 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16415 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16434 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16440 \begin_layout Standard
16441 Dashes can also be inserted with
16443 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16445 \begin_inset space ~
16448 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16452 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16456 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16463 \begin_layout Standard
16464 Hyphen and dashes are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in math
16465 mode and has a length of its own.
16466 Here are some examples:
16469 \begin_layout Enumerate
16470 line- and page-breaks
16471 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16481 \begin_layout Enumerate
16483 \begin_inset space ~
16487 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16497 \begin_layout Enumerate
16498 The em dash is used without spaces: Oh—there's a dash.
16499 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16509 \begin_layout Enumerate
16510 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
16514 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16524 \begin_layout Standard
16526 \begin_inset CommandInset href
16528 name "Wikipedia entry on dashes"
16529 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dash"
16537 \begin_layout Subsection
16538 Dashes and line breaks
16539 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16541 name "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
16548 \begin_layout Standard
16549 Whether line breaks around dashes are allowed depends on the use case and
16553 \begin_layout Itemize
16554 No line breaks are allowed in ranges of values like A–Z or 1975–1982.
16557 \begin_layout Itemize
16558 In English, dashes used to set off parenthetical statements should not start
16562 \begin_layout Itemize
16563 In French and Spanish, dashes around parenthetical statements are treated
16564 similar to brackets: line breaks are not allowed on the inner side.
16567 \begin_layout Standard
16568 When using spaced en dashes
16569 \begin_inset space ~
16572 - common in British English
16573 \begin_inset space ~
16576 - line breaks before the dash can be prevented with protected spaces.
16579 \begin_layout Standard
16580 When using em dashes without spaces—\SpecialChar allowbreak
16581 common in American English—\SpecialChar allowbreak
16583 optional line breaks with the menu
16585 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16586 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
16587 Optional line break
16592 \begin_layout Standard
16593 For documents containing many em dashes, you may consider to select the
16596 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16597 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
16598 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
16599 Output en- and em-dashes as ligatures.
16602 This forces the output of dashes as
16603 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16607 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16611 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16615 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16618 when exporting to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16620 The \SpecialChar TeX
16621 font ligature mechanism converts them to dash characters followed
16622 by an optional line break.
16625 \begin_layout Standard
16629 \begin_layout Enumerate
16630 This results in optional line breaks after
16635 Incorrect line breaks must be prevented by wrapping in a makebox
16639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16642 Prevent Hyphenation
16647 \begin_inset space ~
16663 in \SpecialChar TeX
16669 \begin_layout Itemize
16671 \begin_inset space ~
16675 \begin_inset Box Frameless
16685 height_special "totalheight"
16690 backgroundcolor "none"
16693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16702 \begin_layout Itemize
16706 \begin_inset Box Frameless
16716 height_special "totalheight"
16721 backgroundcolor "none"
16724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16728 \begin_inset space ~
16736 si tout le monde ne les aime pas
16737 \begin_inset space ~
16740 – sont très utiles.
16743 \begin_layout Itemize
16750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16759 —un inciso con rayas— se escribe así.
16762 \begin_layout Standard
16763 An incorrect line break is easily overlooked because
16764 \begin_inset space ~
16767 – in contrast to an overfull line
16768 \begin_inset space ~
16771 – it does not trigger a warning in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16776 \begin_layout Enumerate
16777 The setting is ignored for documents using non-\SpecialChar TeX
16782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16788 XeTeXdashbreakstate
16791 The default causes dashes to behave like ligature dashes.
16792 The usual behaviour of literal dashes can be achieved by inserting
16797 XeTeXdashbreakstate=0
16800 into the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16809 \begin_layout Enumerate
16825 \begin_layout Enumerate
16826 Hyphenation is suppressed in words adjacent to hyphens and ligature dashes.
16829 \begin_layout Standard
16830 Since \SpecialChar LyX
16832 \begin_inset space ~
16835 2.2, -- and --- are exported to LaTeX as -{}- and -{}-{}- to prevent ligation
16840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16841 Up to \SpecialChar LyX
16843 \begin_inset space ~
16846 2.1, -- and --- was output unchanged which led to different look in \SpecialChar LyX
16848 export, HTML export and the PDF export.
16853 Occurrences in older documents are converted to literal Unicode dashes.
16854 This led to different line breaks in some documents.
16857 \begin_inset space ~
16860 2.3 provides the option
16862 Output en- and em-dashes as ligatures
16866 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16867 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
16871 It is on by default but unselected when opening documents edited with \SpecialChar LyX
16873 \begin_inset space ~
16877 \begin_inset Newline newline
16880 Note the following side-effects of the changes in \SpecialChar LyX
16884 \begin_layout Itemize
16885 If you used literal em- and en dashes in pre-\SpecialChar LyX
16887 \begin_inset space ~
16890 2.2 documents, you must manually unselect
16892 Output en- and em-dashes as ligatures
16894 to ensure unchanged behavior.
16898 \begin_layout Itemize
16899 If you used both, literal and ligature dashes in pre-\SpecialChar LyX
16901 \begin_inset space ~
16904 2.2 documents, you may need to enable or prevent individual line breaks as
16905 shown above to restore the correct line breaking behaviour.
16908 \begin_layout Itemize
16909 Zero-width space (ZWSP) characters in older \SpecialChar LyX
16910 documents that follow literal
16911 em- and en-dashes are removed during the conversion to the format of \SpecialChar LyX
16913 \begin_inset space ~
16917 If you used them as optional line breaks after dashes, convert them to
16918 space insets before opening your document with \SpecialChar LyX
16920 \begin_inset space ~
16923 2.3 or the optional line breaks will be lost.
16926 \begin_layout Subsection
16928 \begin_inset Index idx
16931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16938 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16940 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
16947 \begin_layout Standard
16948 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
16949 but automatically in the output.
16950 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16956 \begin_inset Index idx
16959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16966 following the rules of the document language.
16969 \begin_layout Standard
16971 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
16975 font and with unusual constructs, like
16976 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16980 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16984 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
16985 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
16986 This is done with the menu
16988 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16989 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
16991 \begin_inset space ~
16997 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16999 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
17003 \begin_layout Standard
17004 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
17005 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
17007 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17011 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17016 would then see the hyphen
17017 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17021 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17024 as a hyphenation possibility.
17025 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
17026 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can use a protected
17029 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17030 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17033 ) or put it into a makebox as described in section
17035 Prevent Hyphenation
17040 \begin_inset space ~
17048 \begin_layout Subsection
17050 \begin_inset Index idx
17053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17062 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17063 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
17064 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17066 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
17073 \begin_layout Standard
17074 When \SpecialChar LyX
17075 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
17076 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
17078 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
17081 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17084 appropriate amount of space.
17085 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17088 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
17090 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
17091 gets after another word.
17094 \begin_layout Standard
17095 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
17096 not work in all cases.
17098 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17106 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17109 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
17110 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
17113 \begin_layout Standard
17114 Here are some examples of
17118 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
17121 \begin_layout Itemize
17126 \begin_layout Itemize
17131 \begin_layout Standard
17132 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
17135 \begin_layout Itemize
17137 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17141 this is too much space!
17144 \begin_layout Itemize
17149 \begin_layout Standard
17150 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
17153 \begin_layout Standard
17154 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
17157 \begin_layout Enumerate
17161 \begin_inset space ~
17166 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
17167 \begin_inset space ~
17171 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17173 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
17178 \begin_inset Index idx
17181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17182 Spaces ! inter-word
17190 \begin_layout Enumerate
17194 \begin_inset space ~
17199 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
17200 \begin_inset space ~
17204 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17206 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
17211 \begin_inset Index idx
17214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17223 \begin_layout Enumerate
17227 \begin_inset space ~
17231 \begin_inset space ~
17235 \begin_inset space ~
17242 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17244 \begin_inset space ~
17249 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
17250 This function is also bound to
17253 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
17259 \begin_layout Standard
17260 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
17263 \begin_layout Itemize
17265 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17269 \begin_inset space \space{}
17272 this is too much space!
17275 \begin_layout Itemize
17276 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
17280 \begin_layout Standard
17281 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
17282 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
17284 will take care of this.
17287 \begin_layout Standard
17288 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
17292 \begin_inset space ~
17298 feature described in the section
17300 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
17305 Additional Features
17310 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17312 \begin_inset Index idx
17315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17316 Typography ! Quotation marks
17322 \begin_inset Index idx
17325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17326 Quotation marks | see
17330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17356 \begin_layout Standard
17358 usually sets quotation marks correctly.
17359 Specifically, it will insert an opening mark at the beginning of quoted
17360 text, and use a closing mark at the end.
17362 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17366 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17370 The keyboard character,
17374 , generates this automatically.
17377 \begin_layout Standard
17378 You can specify what character the
17382 key produces by using the submenu
17388 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17392 \begin_inset Index idx
17395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17396 Document ! Settings
17401 dialog and switching the
17405 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
17406 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language).
17408 \begin_inset space ~
17414 \begin_layout Labeling
17415 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17419 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17423 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17427 \begin_inset space ~
17431 \begin_inset space ~
17435 \begin_inset Quotes els
17439 \begin_inset Quotes ers
17445 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17449 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17453 \begin_inset Quotes els
17457 \begin_inset Quotes ers
17460 quotation marks (as common, e.
17461 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17467 \begin_layout Labeling
17468 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17471 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17475 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17479 \begin_inset space ~
17483 \begin_inset space ~
17487 \begin_inset Quotes sls
17491 \begin_inset Quotes srs
17497 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17501 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17505 \begin_inset Quotes sls
17509 \begin_inset Quotes srs
17512 quotation marks (as common, e.
17513 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17519 \begin_layout Labeling
17520 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17523 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17527 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17531 \begin_inset space ~
17535 \begin_inset space ~
17539 \begin_inset Quotes gls
17543 \begin_inset Quotes grs
17549 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17553 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17557 \begin_inset Quotes gls
17561 \begin_inset Quotes grs
17564 quotation marks (as common, e.
17565 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17571 \begin_layout Labeling
17572 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17575 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17579 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17583 \begin_inset space ~
17587 \begin_inset space ~
17591 \begin_inset Quotes pls
17595 \begin_inset Quotes prs
17601 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17605 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17609 \begin_inset Quotes pls
17613 \begin_inset Quotes prs
17616 quotation marks (as common, e.
17617 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17623 \begin_layout Labeling
17624 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17627 \begin_inset Quotes cld
17631 \begin_inset Quotes crd
17635 \begin_inset space ~
17639 \begin_inset space ~
17643 \begin_inset Quotes cls
17647 \begin_inset Quotes crs
17653 \begin_inset Quotes cld
17657 \begin_inset Quotes crd
17661 \begin_inset Quotes cls
17665 \begin_inset Quotes crs
17668 quotation marks (as common, e.
17669 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17672 g., in Switzerland)
17675 \begin_layout Labeling
17676 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17679 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17683 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17687 \begin_inset space ~
17691 \begin_inset space ~
17695 \begin_inset Quotes als
17699 \begin_inset Quotes ars
17705 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17709 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17713 \begin_inset Quotes als
17717 \begin_inset Quotes ars
17720 quotation marks (as common, e.
17721 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17727 \begin_layout Labeling
17728 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17731 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17735 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17739 \begin_inset space ~
17743 \begin_inset space ~
17747 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17751 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17757 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17761 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17765 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17769 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17772 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
17775 \begin_layout Labeling
17776 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17779 \begin_inset Quotes bld
17783 \begin_inset Quotes brd
17787 \begin_inset space ~
17791 \begin_inset space ~
17795 \begin_inset Quotes bls
17799 \begin_inset Quotes brs
17805 \begin_inset Quotes bld
17809 \begin_inset Quotes brd
17813 \begin_inset Quotes bls
17817 \begin_inset Quotes brs
17820 quotation marks (as common, e.
17821 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17824 g., in Great Britain)
17827 \begin_layout Labeling
17828 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17831 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17835 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17839 \begin_inset space ~
17843 \begin_inset space ~
17847 \begin_inset Quotes fls
17851 \begin_inset Quotes frs
17857 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17861 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17865 \begin_inset Quotes fls
17869 \begin_inset Quotes frs
17872 quotation marks (as common, e.
17873 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17879 \begin_layout Labeling
17880 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17883 \begin_inset Quotes ild
17887 \begin_inset Quotes ird
17891 \begin_inset space ~
17895 \begin_inset space ~
17899 \begin_inset Quotes ils
17903 \begin_inset Quotes irs
17909 \begin_inset Quotes ild
17913 \begin_inset Quotes ird
17917 \begin_inset Quotes ils
17921 \begin_inset Quotes irs
17924 quotation marks (another style common in France)
17928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17929 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
17930 since these look identical to the inner marks.
17931 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where
17932 the inner marks differ).
17940 \begin_layout Labeling
17941 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17944 \begin_inset Quotes rld
17948 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
17952 \begin_inset space ~
17956 \begin_inset space ~
17960 \begin_inset Quotes rls
17964 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
17970 \begin_inset Quotes rld
17974 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
17978 \begin_inset Quotes rls
17982 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
17985 quotation marks (as common, e.
17986 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17992 \begin_layout Labeling
17993 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17996 \begin_inset Quotes wld
18000 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
18004 \begin_inset space ~
18008 \begin_inset space ~
18012 \begin_inset Quotes wls
18016 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
18022 \begin_inset Quotes wld
18026 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
18030 \begin_inset Quotes wls
18034 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
18037 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
18040 \begin_layout Labeling
18041 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18042 \begin_inset Quotes jld
18050 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
18056 \begin_inset space ~
18060 \begin_inset space ~
18066 \begin_inset Quotes jls
18074 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
18078 \begin_inset Quotes jld
18082 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
18086 \begin_inset Quotes jls
18090 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
18093 quotation marks (as common, e.
18094 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18102 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
18103 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
18111 \begin_layout Labeling
18112 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18113 \begin_inset Quotes kld
18121 \begin_inset Quotes krd
18127 \begin_inset space ~
18131 \begin_inset space ~
18137 \begin_inset Quotes kls
18145 \begin_inset Quotes krs
18149 \begin_inset Quotes kld
18153 \begin_inset Quotes krd
18157 \begin_inset Quotes kls
18161 \begin_inset Quotes krs
18164 quotation marks (as common, e.
18165 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18168 g., in North Korea and China)
18172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18173 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
18174 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
18182 \begin_layout Standard
18183 Inner quotation marks
18187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18188 In many writing cultures, these are single quotation marks.
18189 But as the British and French styles show, this is not necessarily the
18190 case (and specifically the British style shows that
18191 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18195 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18198 does not necessarily mean
18199 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18203 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18207 This is why we call them
18208 \begin_inset Quotes els
18212 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18216 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18220 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18228 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages, such
18230 \begin_inset Quotes els
18234 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18237 ) can be obtained by means of the shortcut
18240 arg "quote-insert inner"
18245 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18251 \begin_layout Standard
18252 By default, the quotation mark styles are persistent.
18253 That is to say, a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when
18254 it was inserted, even if the document-wide style changes.
18255 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
18256 If you check the setting
18258 Use dynamic quotation marks
18262 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18263 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18266 , however, special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
18267 they appear in a special color).
18268 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
18269 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in
18271 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18274 g., if your publisher requests a different style).
18277 \begin_layout Standard
18278 Individual quotation marks (i.
18279 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18282 e., their level [inner, outer], side [opening, closing], and style) can be
18283 easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a
18287 \begin_layout Subsection
18289 \begin_inset Index idx
18292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18293 Typography ! Ligatures
18299 \begin_inset Index idx
18302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18331 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18333 name "subsec:Ligatures"
18340 \begin_layout Standard
18341 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
18342 print them as single characters.
18343 These groups are known as
18348 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
18349 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
18351 Here are the standard ligatures:
18354 \begin_layout Itemize
18358 \begin_layout Itemize
18362 \begin_layout Itemize
18366 \begin_layout Itemize
18370 \begin_layout Itemize
18374 \begin_layout Standard
18375 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
18378 \begin_layout Standard
18379 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
18380 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
18381 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18385 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18388 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
18389 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18393 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18397 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18401 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18404 To break a ligature, use
18406 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18407 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18409 \begin_inset space ~
18416 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18420 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18424 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18427 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
18429 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18433 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18437 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18441 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18444 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
18446 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18452 \begin_layout Subsection
18454 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
18456 \begin_inset Index idx
18459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18469 \begin_layout Standard
18472 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18473 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
18477 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
18480 \begin_layout Description
18482 The name of the game.
18485 \begin_layout Description
18487 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
18491 \begin_layout Description
18493 The \SpecialChar TeX
18494 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
18498 \begin_layout Description
18499 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
18500 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
18504 \begin_layout Standard
18505 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18507 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18511 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
18515 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18519 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
18520 world to give programs geek version numbers.
18521 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
18522 converges to the number
18523 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
18526 : The actual version is
18527 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18532 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18535 , the previous one was
18536 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18541 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18547 \begin_layout Subsection
18549 \begin_inset Index idx
18552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18561 \begin_layout Standard
18562 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
18563 space between two words.
18564 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
18567 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18571 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18574 for units use the menu
18576 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18577 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18579 \begin_inset space ~
18587 arg "space-insert thin"
18593 \begin_layout Standard
18594 Here is an example to show the differences:
18597 \begin_layout Standard
18598 \begin_inset Tabular
18599 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
18600 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
18601 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18602 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18604 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18609 \begin_inset space ~
18613 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
18621 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18625 space between number and unit
18632 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18637 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18641 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
18649 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18653 half space between number and unit
18666 \begin_layout Subsection
18668 \begin_inset Index idx
18671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18672 Typography ! Widows and orphans
18680 \begin_layout Standard
18681 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
18683 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
18684 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
18685 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
18686 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
18687 These bits of text became known as
18698 \begin_layout Standard
18699 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
18700 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
18701 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
18702 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
18703 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
18704 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
18705 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
18706 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
18707 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
18708 \begin_inset Newline newline
18716 \begin_inset Newline newline
18724 \begin_inset Newline newline
18727 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18728 preamble of your document to avoid them.
18729 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
18731 \begin_inset space ~
18735 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
18737 key "latexcompanion"
18743 \begin_inset space ~
18747 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
18754 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
18755 's page break mechanism.
18758 \begin_layout Chapter
18759 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
18760 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18762 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
18769 \begin_layout Standard
18770 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
18773 \begin_inset space ~
18779 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
18782 \begin_layout Section
18784 \begin_inset Index idx
18787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18794 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18803 \begin_layout Standard
18805 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
18808 \begin_layout Description
18811 \begin_inset space ~
18814 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
18815 \begin_inset Newline newline
18819 \begin_inset Note Note
18822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18823 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
18831 \begin_layout Description
18832 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
18833 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
18834 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18837 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
18838 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
18840 \begin_inset space ~
18846 \begin_inset Newline newline
18850 \begin_inset Note Comment
18853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18854 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
18863 \begin_layout Description
18865 \begin_inset space ~
18868 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
18869 set in the document settings under
18871 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
18873 \begin_inset space ~
18879 \begin_inset Newline newline
18883 \begin_inset Newline newline
18887 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
18890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18896 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
18897 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
18902 of a comment that appears in the output.
18908 \begin_inset Newline newline
18912 \begin_inset Newline newline
18915 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
18918 \begin_layout Standard
18919 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
18927 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18931 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
18934 \begin_layout Section
18936 \begin_inset Index idx
18939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18946 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18948 name "sec:Footnotes"
18955 \begin_layout Standard
18957 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
18960 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18963 or the toolbar button
18966 arg "footnote-insert"
18978 \begin_inset Graphics
18979 filename clipart/footnote.png
18988 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
18989 's representation of your footnote.
18999 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19007 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19018 label, the box will
19022 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
19023 Clicking on the box label again will close
19036 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
19037 and click on the footnote
19052 \begin_layout Standard
19053 Here is an example footnote:
19061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19062 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
19070 \begin_layout Standard
19071 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
19072 position where the footnote box is placed.
19073 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
19074 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
19075 according to the document class.
19077 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
19078 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
19084 ey are described in the
19087 \begin_inset space ~
19095 \begin_layout Section
19097 \begin_inset Index idx
19100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19107 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19109 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
19116 \begin_layout Standard
19117 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
19119 When you insert a margin note via the menu
19121 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19123 \begin_inset space ~
19128 or the toolbar button
19131 arg "marginalnote-insert"
19150 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19154 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19157 appearing within your text.
19158 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
19159 's representation of your margin
19168 \begin_layout Standard
19169 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
19173 \begin_inset Marginal
19176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19178 This is a marginal note.
19186 \begin_layout Standard
19187 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
19188 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
19189 pages, right on odd pages.
19192 \begin_layout Standard
19193 For further information about marginal notes see the section
19196 \begin_inset space ~
19204 \begin_inset space ~
19212 \begin_layout Section
19213 Graphics and Images
19214 \begin_inset Index idx
19217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19224 \begin_inset Index idx
19227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19234 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19236 name "sec:Graphics"
19243 \begin_layout Standard
19244 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
19245 you want and click on the toolbar icon
19248 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
19253 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19257 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
19260 \begin_layout Standard
19261 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
19266 tab allows you to choose your image file.
19267 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
19269 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
19270 \begin_inset space ~
19274 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19276 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
19283 \begin_layout Standard
19288 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
19289 of the image in the output.
19290 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
19294 \begin_inset space ~
19298 \begin_inset space ~
19307 \begin_inset space ~
19311 \begin_inset space ~
19315 \begin_inset space ~
19320 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
19321 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
19329 \begin_layout Standard
19333 \begin_inset space ~
19337 \begin_inset space ~
19342 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
19343 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
19345 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
19350 \begin_inset space ~
19355 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
19356 with the image size is printed.
19359 \begin_layout Standard
19360 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
19361 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
19363 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
19366 \begin_layout Standard
19368 \begin_inset Graphics
19369 filename clipart/2D-intensity-plot.pdf
19377 \begin_layout Standard
19378 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
19379 the image into a float, see section
19380 \begin_inset space ~
19384 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19386 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
19393 \begin_layout Subsection
19395 \begin_inset Index idx
19398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19405 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19407 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
19414 \begin_layout Standard
19415 You can insert images in any known file format.
19416 But as we explained in section
19417 \begin_inset space ~
19421 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19423 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
19427 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
19429 therefore uses the program
19433 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
19434 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
19435 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
19436 \begin_inset space ~
19440 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19442 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
19449 \begin_layout Standard
19450 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
19453 \begin_layout Description
19455 \begin_inset space ~
19458 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
19459 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
19460 Well-known bitmap image formats are
19461 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19464 Graphics Interchange Format
19465 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19468 (GIF, file extension
19469 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19477 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19481 \begin_inset Index idx
19484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19513 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19516 Portable Network Graphics
19517 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19520 (PNG, file extension
19521 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19529 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19533 \begin_inset Index idx
19536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19565 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19568 Joint Photographic Experts Group
19569 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19572 (JPG, file extension
19573 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19581 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19585 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19593 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19597 \begin_inset Index idx
19600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19631 \begin_layout Description
19633 \begin_inset space ~
19636 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
19638 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
19639 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
19640 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
19641 \begin_inset Newline newline
19644 Scalable image formats can be
19645 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19648 Scalable Vector Graphics
19649 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19652 (SVG, file extension
19653 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19661 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19665 \begin_inset Index idx
19668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19697 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19700 Encapsulated PostScript
19701 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19704 (EPS, file extension
19705 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19713 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19717 \begin_inset Index idx
19720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19749 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19752 Portable Document Format
19753 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19756 (PDF, file extension
19757 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19765 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19769 \begin_inset Index idx
19772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19780 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19784 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19787 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
19788 result will not be scalable.
19789 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
19794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19795 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
19803 \begin_layout Standard
19804 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
19811 \begin_layout Subsection
19812 Grouping of Image Settings
19813 \begin_inset Index idx
19816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19817 Images ! Settings grouping
19825 \begin_layout Standard
19826 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
19828 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
19829 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
19831 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
19832 need to manually change each of them.
19836 \begin_layout Standard
19837 A new group can be set by pressing the button
19840 \begin_inset space ~
19844 \begin_inset space ~
19856 \begin_inset space ~
19860 \begin_inset space ~
19866 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
19867 and checking the name of the desired group.
19870 \begin_layout Section
19872 \begin_inset Index idx
19875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19882 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19891 \begin_layout Standard
19892 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
19895 arg "tabular-insert"
19900 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19904 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
19905 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
19906 from the rest of the table.
19907 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
19908 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
19910 Here is an example table:
19913 \begin_layout Standard
19915 \begin_inset Tabular
19916 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
19917 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
19918 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19919 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19920 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
19921 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19923 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19950 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19959 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19970 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20006 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20017 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20035 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20044 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20057 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20068 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20121 \begin_layout Subsection
20125 \begin_layout Standard
20126 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
20129 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
20133 This brings up the table dialog.
20134 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
20135 cursor is placed currently.
20136 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
20137 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
20138 done on all of your selection.
20141 \begin_layout Standard
20142 In addition to the table dialog, the
20145 \begin_inset space ~
20150 helps you in setting table properties.
20151 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
20154 \begin_layout Standard
20158 \begin_inset space ~
20163 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
20164 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
20165 current cell respectively.
20166 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
20168 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
20169 of text, see section
20170 \begin_inset space ~
20174 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20176 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
20183 \begin_layout Standard
20184 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
20185 using the check box
20194 This will merge the cells to
20198 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
20199 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
20200 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
20201 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
20202 in the last row without the upper border:
20205 \begin_layout Standard
20207 \begin_inset Tabular
20208 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
20209 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
20210 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20211 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
20212 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
20213 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20224 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20233 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20242 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20271 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20280 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20289 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20300 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20309 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20318 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20327 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20344 \begin_layout Standard
20345 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
20346 -arguments for the table.
20347 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
20348 explained in the chapter
20355 \begin_inset space ~
20361 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
20362 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
20363 but are visible in the output.
20366 \begin_layout Standard
20367 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
20370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20375 Most DVI-viewers are
20379 able to display rotations.
20387 \begin_layout Standard
20392 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
20397 adds lines for all cell borders.
20400 \begin_layout Subsection
20402 \begin_inset Index idx
20405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20406 Tables ! Multi-page
20412 \begin_inset Index idx
20415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20424 \begin_layout Standard
20425 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
20428 \begin_inset space ~
20432 \begin_inset space ~
20440 \begin_inset space ~
20445 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
20446 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
20449 \begin_layout Description
20454 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
20455 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
20456 Except for the first page, if
20459 \begin_inset space ~
20467 \begin_layout Description
20471 \begin_inset space ~
20476 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
20477 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
20480 \begin_layout Description
20485 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
20486 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
20487 except for the last page, if
20490 \begin_inset space ~
20498 \begin_layout Description
20502 \begin_inset space ~
20507 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
20508 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
20511 \begin_layout Description
20512 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
20513 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
20515 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20519 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
20522 \begin_inset space ~
20530 \begin_layout Standard
20531 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
20532 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
20533 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
20539 In this context, first means first in this order:
20542 \begin_inset space ~
20554 \begin_inset space ~
20559 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
20562 \begin_layout Standard
20564 \begin_inset Tabular
20565 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
20566 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
20567 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
20568 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20569 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20570 <row endfirsthead="true">
20571 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20577 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
20582 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20591 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20601 <row endfirsthead="true">
20602 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20613 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20622 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20634 <row endhead="true">
20635 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20646 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20655 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20665 <row endhead="true">
20666 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20677 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20686 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20698 <row endfoot="true">
20699 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20710 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20719 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20730 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20741 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20750 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20761 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20772 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20781 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20792 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20803 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20812 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20834 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20843 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20854 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20865 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20874 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20885 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20905 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20916 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20927 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20936 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20947 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20958 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20967 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20978 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20989 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20998 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21009 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21020 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21029 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21040 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21051 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21060 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21071 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21082 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21091 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21102 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21113 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21122 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21144 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21153 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21175 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21184 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21195 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21206 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21237 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21257 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21268 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21277 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21299 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21319 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21330 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21361 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21370 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21392 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21401 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21412 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21423 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21443 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21454 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21463 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21474 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21485 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21494 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21505 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21516 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21525 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21536 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21547 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21556 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21567 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21578 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21587 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21598 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21609 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21618 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21629 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21640 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21649 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21660 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21671 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21680 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21691 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21700 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
21703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21709 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21720 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21740 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21751 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21762 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21782 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21793 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21802 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21813 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21824 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21833 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21844 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21855 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21864 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21875 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21886 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21895 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21906 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21917 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21937 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21948 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21957 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21968 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21979 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21999 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22010 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22019 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22030 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22041 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22050 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22061 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22072 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22081 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22092 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22103 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22123 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22134 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22143 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22154 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22165 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22174 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22185 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22196 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22216 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22247 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22258 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22267 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22278 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22289 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22309 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22320 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22329 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22340 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22351 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22371 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22382 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22402 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22422 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22433 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22444 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22453 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22464 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22475 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22484 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22495 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22506 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22515 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22526 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22537 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22546 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22557 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22568 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22577 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22588 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22599 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22608 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22619 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22630 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22639 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22650 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22661 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22670 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22680 <row endlastfoot="true">
22681 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22692 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
22695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22701 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22718 \begin_layout Subsection
22720 \begin_inset Index idx
22723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22730 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22732 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
22739 \begin_layout Standard
22740 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
22741 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
22742 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
22743 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
22747 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
22750 \begin_layout Standard
22751 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
22752 for the column in the table dialog.
22753 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
22754 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
22758 \begin_layout Standard
22760 \begin_inset Tabular
22761 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
22762 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
22763 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22764 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
22765 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22767 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22785 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22803 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22841 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22854 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
22859 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22879 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22897 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22910 This is longer now.
22915 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22953 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22966 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
22967 This is longer now.
22972 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22998 \begin_layout Standard
22999 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
23000 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
23004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23005 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
23006 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
23012 Selection with the mouse or with
23016 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
23017 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
23018 the selection from outside the table.
23021 \begin_layout Section
23023 \begin_inset Index idx
23026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23033 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23042 \begin_layout Subsection
23046 \begin_layout Standard
23047 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
23048 have a fixed location.
23050 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23054 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23057 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
23065 \begin_inset space ~
23070 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
23071 too many notes on the current page.
23074 \begin_layout Standard
23075 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
23076 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
23077 and pages without text.
23078 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
23079 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
23080 Floats are therefore numbered.
23081 Referencing is described in section
23082 \begin_inset space ~
23086 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23088 reference "sec:Cross-References"
23095 \begin_layout Standard
23096 To insert a float, use the menu
23098 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23102 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
23103 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
23105 After the label you can insert the caption text.
23106 \begin_inset Index idx
23109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23115 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
23116 paragraph within the float.
23117 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
23118 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
23119 left-clicking on the box label.
23120 A closed float box looks like this:
23121 \begin_inset Graphics
23122 filename clipart/float.png
23127 – a gray button with a red label.
23130 \begin_layout Standard
23131 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
23133 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
23136 \begin_layout Subsection
23138 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23140 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
23145 \begin_inset Index idx
23148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23149 Floats ! Figure floats
23157 \begin_layout Standard
23159 \begin_inset space ~
23163 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23165 reference "fig:A-star-in"
23169 was created using the menu
23171 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23172 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
23178 arg "float-insert figure"
23182 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
23185 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23191 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
23195 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
23196 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
23198 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
23200 \begin_inset space ~
23208 arg "layout-paragraph"
23214 \begin_layout Standard
23215 \begin_inset Float figure
23220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23222 \begin_inset Graphics
23223 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
23232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23233 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23236 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23238 name "fig:A-star-in"
23255 \begin_layout Standard
23256 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
23257 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
23259 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23268 ) and refer to it using the menu
23270 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23276 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
23280 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
23281 vague references like
23282 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23286 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23289 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
23290 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
23292 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23296 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23300 For more about cross-references, see section
23301 \begin_inset space ~
23305 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23307 reference "sec:Cross-References"
23314 \begin_layout Standard
23315 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
23316 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
23317 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
23318 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
23319 as described in section
23320 \begin_inset space ~
23324 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23326 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
23332 \begin_inset space ~
23336 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23338 reference "fig:Two-images"
23342 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
23343 You can also set the images one below the other.
23345 \begin_inset space ~
23349 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23351 reference "fig:Undefinable"
23356 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23358 reference "fig:Star"
23362 are the subfigures.
23365 \begin_layout Standard
23366 \begin_inset Float figure
23371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23372 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23376 \begin_inset Float figure
23381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23382 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23385 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23387 name "fig:Undefinable"
23399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23400 \begin_inset Graphics
23401 filename clipart/3D-structure-distort.pdf
23413 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23417 \begin_inset Float figure
23422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23423 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23426 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23441 \begin_inset Graphics
23442 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
23454 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23461 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23464 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23466 name "fig:Two-images"
23483 \begin_layout Subsection
23485 \begin_inset Index idx
23488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23489 Floats ! Table floats
23497 \begin_layout Standard
23498 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
23500 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23501 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
23504 or the toolbar button
23507 arg "float-insert table"
23511 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
23512 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
23513 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
23515 \begin_inset space ~
23519 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23521 reference "tab:Table-float"
23528 \begin_layout Standard
23529 \begin_inset Float table
23534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23535 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23538 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23540 name "tab:Table-float"
23552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23554 \begin_inset Tabular
23555 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
23556 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
23557 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23558 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23559 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23561 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23579 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23597 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23617 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23653 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23673 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23686 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
23694 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23707 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
23710 \end{array}\right]$
23718 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23731 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
23752 \begin_layout Subsection
23754 \begin_inset Index idx
23757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23766 \begin_layout Standard
23768 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
23769 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
23770 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
23772 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
23780 \begin_inset space ~
23788 \begin_layout Section
23790 \begin_inset Index idx
23793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23802 \begin_layout Standard
23804 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
23806 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
23807 \begin_inset space \space{}
23814 \begin_layout Standard
23815 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
23816 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
23818 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23822 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
23823 and its alignment within the page.
23826 \begin_layout Standard
23828 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23838 height_special "totalheight"
23843 backgroundcolor "none"
23846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23849 This is a minipage.
23850 The text is set in an italic style.
23853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23856 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
23857 another formatting.
23865 \begin_layout Standard
23866 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
23869 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
23873 as described in section
23874 \begin_inset space ~
23878 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23880 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
23885 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
23891 \begin_layout Standard
23892 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23902 height_special "totalheight"
23907 backgroundcolor "none"
23910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23911 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
23912 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
23918 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23922 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23932 height_special "totalheight"
23937 backgroundcolor "none"
23940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23941 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
23942 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
23950 \begin_layout Standard
23951 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
23957 \begin_layout Standard
23958 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
23960 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
23967 \begin_inset space ~
23975 \begin_layout Chapter
23976 Mathematical Formulas
23977 \begin_inset Index idx
23980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23987 \begin_inset Index idx
23990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24019 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24021 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
24028 \begin_layout Standard
24029 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
24034 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
24037 \begin_layout Section
24039 \begin_inset Index idx
24042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24051 \begin_layout Standard
24052 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
24065 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
24067 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
24068 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
24069 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
24071 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24077 \begin_layout Standard
24078 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
24082 \begin_inset space ~
24087 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
24090 \begin_layout Standard
24091 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
24092 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
24095 \begin_layout Standard
24096 This is a line with an inline formula
24097 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
24103 \begin_layout Standard
24104 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
24105 paragraph, like this one:
24106 \begin_inset Formula
24113 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
24116 \begin_layout Standard
24118 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
24120 For example, typing
24121 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24131 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24134 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
24135 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
24139 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
24142 \begin_inset space ~
24150 \begin_layout Subsection
24151 Navigating in Formulas
24152 \begin_inset Index idx
24155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24164 \begin_layout Standard
24165 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
24166 achieved with the arrow keys.
24168 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
24169 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
24174 will leave a formula construct (a square root
24175 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
24179 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
24183 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
24186 \end{array}\right]$
24194 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
24199 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
24200 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
24203 \begin_layout Standard
24208 , printed in this document as
24209 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24213 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24217 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24220 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
24221 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
24222 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
24227 For example, if you want
24228 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
24236 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24246 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24250 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24255 , since in the latter case only the
24258 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
24263 will be under the square root sign:
24264 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
24270 \begin_layout Standard
24271 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
24273 \begin_inset Formula
24275 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
24284 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
24285 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
24288 \begin_layout Subsection
24292 \begin_layout Standard
24293 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
24294 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
24298 and a cursor movement key to select text.
24299 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
24300 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
24301 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
24302 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
24306 \begin_layout Subsection
24307 Exponents and Subscripts
24308 \begin_inset Index idx
24311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24318 \begin_inset Index idx
24321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24330 \begin_layout Standard
24331 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
24334 arg "math-superscript"
24340 arg "math-subscript"
24343 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
24345 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
24348 , type in a formula
24351 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24361 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
24367 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
24371 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
24377 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24383 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
24385 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24389 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24392 , you have to use an extra
24396 to separate the circumflex and the character.
24397 For example, if you want
24398 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
24404 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24410 Subscripts are similar: To get
24411 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
24417 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24425 \begin_layout Subsection
24427 \begin_inset Index idx
24430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24439 \begin_layout Standard
24440 Create a fraction either with the command
24446 or by using the icon
24449 arg "math-insert \\frac"
24455 \begin_inset space ~
24461 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
24462 The cursor is above the fraction line.
24463 To move it to the bottom, simply press
24468 To move back up, press
24473 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
24474 \begin_inset Formula
24476 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
24479 \end{array}\right)}\right]
24487 \begin_layout Subsection
24489 \begin_inset Index idx
24492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24501 \begin_layout Standard
24502 Roots can be created using the
24505 \begin_inset space ~
24513 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
24519 arg "math-insert \\root"
24541 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
24547 always produces a square root.
24550 \begin_layout Subsection
24551 Operators with Limits
24552 \begin_inset Index idx
24555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24562 \begin_inset Index idx
24565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24572 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24574 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
24581 \begin_layout Standard
24583 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
24587 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
24590 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
24591 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
24592 by entering them as you would enter a super-
24593 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
24594 The sum operator will automatically place its
24595 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24599 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24602 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
24604 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
24608 \begin_inset Formula
24610 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
24615 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
24619 \begin_layout Standard
24620 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
24622 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
24623 behind the operator and using the menu
24625 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24626 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24628 \begin_inset space ~
24632 \begin_inset space ~
24646 \begin_layout Standard
24647 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
24648 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24652 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24656 \begin_inset Index idx
24659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24666 \begin_inset Formula
24668 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
24673 which will place the
24674 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
24678 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24682 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24686 In inline formulas it looks like this:
24687 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
24693 \begin_layout Standard
24694 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
24701 Have a look at section
24702 \begin_inset space ~
24706 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24708 reference "subsec:Functions"
24712 for an explanation of function macros.
24715 \begin_layout Subsection
24717 \begin_inset Index idx
24720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24729 \begin_layout Standard
24730 Most math symbols can be found in the
24733 \begin_inset space ~
24738 under one of several categories; including
24755 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
24759 \begin_layout Standard
24760 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
24761 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
24762 don't have to use the
24765 \begin_inset space ~
24770 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
24772 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
24775 \begin_layout Subsection
24777 \begin_inset Index idx
24780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24789 \begin_layout Standard
24790 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
24796 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
24802 \begin_inset space ~
24810 arg "math-insert \\space"
24814 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
24815 For example, the sequence
24820 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
24823 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
24825 \begin_inset Graphics
24826 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
24831 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
24832 the space marker and enter space again several times.
24833 With every space enter the size will be changed.
24834 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
24835 , because they are negative
24837 Here are two examples:
24840 \begin_layout Standard
24850 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
24856 \begin_layout Standard
24866 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
24872 \begin_layout Subsection
24874 \begin_inset Index idx
24877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24884 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24886 name "subsec:Functions"
24893 \begin_layout Standard
24897 \begin_inset space ~
24902 contains under the button
24905 arg "math-insert \\functions"
24908 a number of function macros, such as
24909 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
24913 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
24921 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
24928 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
24929 avoid confusions, because
24930 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
24934 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
24940 \begin_layout Standard
24941 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
24943 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
24947 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
24953 \begin_layout Standard
24954 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
24955 are placed, as described in section
24956 \begin_inset space ~
24960 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24962 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
24969 \begin_layout Subsection
24971 \begin_inset Index idx
24974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24983 \begin_layout Standard
24984 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
24986 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
24987 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
24988 commands, for example, to enter
24989 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
24992 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
24993 Our example is entered by typing
24998 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25005 \begin_inset space ~
25009 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25011 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
25015 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
25018 \begin_layout Standard
25019 \begin_inset Float table
25024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25025 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25028 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25030 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
25034 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
25042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25044 \begin_inset Tabular
25045 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
25046 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25047 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25048 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25049 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25051 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25060 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25133 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
25143 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25161 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25174 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25187 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
25197 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25228 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25241 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
25251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25269 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25282 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25295 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
25305 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25323 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25349 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
25359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25377 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25403 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
25413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25431 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25444 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25457 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
25467 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25485 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25511 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
25521 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25539 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25552 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25565 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
25575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25584 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25597 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25610 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
25631 \begin_layout Standard
25632 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
25635 \begin_inset space ~
25643 arg "math-insert \\hat"
25646 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
25650 \begin_layout Section
25651 Brackets and Delimiters
25652 \begin_inset Index idx
25655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25662 \begin_inset Index idx
25665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25672 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25674 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
25681 \begin_layout Standard
25682 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
25684 For some purposes, using just the keys
25689 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
25690 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
25691 toolbar delimiter icon
25694 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
25698 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
25699 \begin_inset Formula
25701 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
25709 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
25710 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
25714 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
25717 and the expression on the right was entered using the
25723 \begin_inset Formula
25725 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
25733 \begin_layout Standard
25734 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
25735 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
25739 \begin_layout Standard
25740 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
25741 left side and right side.
25742 If you use the option
25745 \begin_inset space ~
25750 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
25751 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
25753 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
25758 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
25759 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
25762 \begin_layout Standard
25763 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
25764 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
25765 is to go inside the brackets.
25766 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
25771 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
25772 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
25773 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
25777 arg "math-delim ( )"
25783 \begin_layout Section
25784 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
25785 \begin_inset Index idx
25788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25795 \begin_inset Index idx
25798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25805 \begin_inset Index idx
25808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25809 Math ! Multi-line Equations
25817 \begin_layout Standard
25818 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
25822 \begin_inset space ~
25830 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
25834 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
25835 Here is an example:
25836 \begin_inset Formula
25838 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
25847 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
25848 \begin_inset space ~
25852 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25854 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
25859 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
25860 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
25861 This alignment is set in the box
25866 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25874 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25878 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25886 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25890 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25898 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25904 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25912 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25915 for every column as default.
25916 For example, the sequence
25917 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25925 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25928 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
25929 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
25930 corresponds to the relevant column.
25931 The result will look like this:
25932 \begin_inset Formula
25935 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
25936 column & has & has\,right\\
25937 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
25946 \begin_layout Standard
25947 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
25950 arg "newline-insert newline"
25953 while the cursor is in the matrix.
25954 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
25956 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25959 or the math toolbar.
25962 \begin_layout Standard
25963 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
25964 It can be created with the menu
25966 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25967 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25969 \begin_inset space ~
25981 Here is an example:
25982 \begin_inset Formula
25996 \begin_layout Standard
25997 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
26000 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
26003 arg "newline-insert newline"
26007 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
26012 arg "newline-insert newline"
26015 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
26016 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26020 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26023 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
26024 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
26025 A new row is created by every further entry of
26028 arg "newline-insert newline"
26032 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
26033 Here is an example:
26034 \begin_inset Formula
26036 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
26037 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
26042 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
26043 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
26044 \begin_inset Formula
26046 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
26054 \begin_layout Standard
26055 The multi-line formula type described here is called
26062 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
26063 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
26064 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26066 reference "eq:asquared"
26071 The other types are described in section
26072 \begin_inset space ~
26076 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26078 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
26085 \begin_layout Section
26086 Formula Numbering and Referencing
26087 \begin_inset Index idx
26090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26091 Math ! Formula numbering
26097 \begin_inset Index idx
26100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26101 Math ! Referencing formulas
26107 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26109 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
26116 \begin_layout Standard
26117 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
26119 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26120 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26122 \begin_inset space ~
26126 \begin_inset space ~
26134 arg "math-number-toggle"
26138 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26139 within parentheses.
26140 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
26141 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
26142 the document class.
26143 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
26144 separated by a dot:
26145 \begin_inset Formula
26155 arg "math-number-toggle"
26158 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
26159 You can only number displayed formulas.
26162 \begin_layout Standard
26163 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
26165 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26166 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26168 \begin_inset space ~
26172 \begin_inset space ~
26180 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
26183 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
26184 \begin_inset Formula
26187 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
26193 To number all lines use the shortcut
26196 arg "math-number-toggle"
26202 \begin_layout Standard
26203 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
26206 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
26207 A label is inserted with the menu
26209 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26218 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
26219 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
26220 It is recommended that you use the suggested
26221 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26229 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26232 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
26233 label type when you have many labels in your document.
26234 We inserted in the following example the label
26235 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26239 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26242 in the second line:
26243 \begin_inset Formula
26245 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
26246 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
26251 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
26252 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
26253 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
26255 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26257 \begin_inset space ~
26265 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
26269 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
26270 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26271 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
26272 as the formula number:
26275 \begin_layout Standard
26276 This is a cross-reference to equation (
26277 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26279 reference "eq:tanhExp"
26286 \begin_layout Standard
26287 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
26288 's cross-reference box are described in section
26289 \begin_inset space ~
26293 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26295 reference "sec:Cross-References"
26300 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
26308 \begin_layout Section
26309 User defined math macros
26310 \begin_inset Index idx
26313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26322 \begin_layout Standard
26324 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
26325 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
26326 Math macros are explained in section
26329 \begin_inset space ~
26341 \begin_layout Section
26345 \begin_layout Subsection
26347 \begin_inset Index idx
26350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26359 \begin_layout Standard
26360 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
26361 To set a font in a formula, use the
26364 \begin_inset space ~
26372 arg "math-insert \\font"
26375 , or enter its command, listed in table
26376 \begin_inset space ~
26380 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26382 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
26389 \begin_layout Standard
26390 \begin_inset Float table
26395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26396 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26399 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26401 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
26405 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
26413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26415 \begin_inset Tabular
26416 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
26417 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
26418 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26419 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26430 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26451 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
26459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26474 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26478 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
26486 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26505 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
26513 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26528 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26538 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
26546 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26561 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26565 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
26573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26588 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26592 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
26600 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26626 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
26634 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26649 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26653 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
26661 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26687 \begin_layout Standard
26688 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26696 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
26712 \begin_layout Standard
26713 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
26714 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
26719 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
26720 space when you need a space in the box.
26721 Here is an example where
26722 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26726 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26733 denotes the set of numbers:
26734 \begin_inset Formula
26736 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
26744 \begin_layout Standard
26745 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
26746 You can, for example, put a character in
26755 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
26759 \begin_inset Newline newline
26762 So it is better not to use this feature.
26765 \begin_layout Standard
26766 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
26767 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
26771 \begin_inset Newline newline
26774 You can only print them emboldened using the command
26780 , which works like the other typeface commands:
26781 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
26787 \begin_layout Standard
26794 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
26797 \begin_layout Standard
26798 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
26800 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26801 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26803 \begin_inset space ~
26811 \begin_layout Subsection
26813 \begin_inset Index idx
26816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26825 \begin_layout Standard
26826 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
26828 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
26832 \begin_inset space ~
26836 \begin_inset space ~
26844 \begin_inset space ~
26852 arg "math-insert \\font"
26856 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26857 in black instead of blue.
26858 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
26859 Here is an example:
26860 \begin_inset Formula
26863 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
26864 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
26873 \begin_layout Subsection
26875 \begin_inset Index idx
26878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26887 \begin_layout Standard
26888 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
26889 automatically chosen in most situations.
26907 For most characters,
26915 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
26916 and certain other structures, are set larger in
26921 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
26922 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
26923 thinks are appropriate.
26924 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
26927 arg "math-insert \\style"
26931 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
26932 For example, you can set
26933 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
26936 , which is normally in
26945 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
26949 The four styles are used in the following example:
26952 \begin_layout Standard
26953 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
26957 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
26961 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
26965 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
26971 \begin_layout Standard
26972 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
26973 is set in a particular size with the menu
26975 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26977 \begin_inset space ~
26982 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
26983 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
26984 will be adjusted to correspond.
26985 As an example here is a formula in the font size
26986 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26990 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26996 \begin_layout Standard
27000 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
27006 \begin_layout Section
27007 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
27009 \begin_inset Index idx
27012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27019 \begin_inset Index idx
27022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27031 \begin_layout Standard
27033 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
27034 that are in common use.
27037 \begin_layout Subsection
27038 Enabling AMS-Support
27041 \begin_layout Standard
27042 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
27043 the document by selecting the checkbox
27046 \begin_inset space ~
27050 \begin_inset space ~
27054 \begin_inset space ~
27061 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27065 \begin_inset Index idx
27068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27069 Document ! Settings
27077 \begin_inset space ~
27083 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
27084 -errors in formulas,
27085 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
27088 \begin_layout Subsection
27090 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27092 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
27097 \begin_inset Index idx
27100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27101 Math ! Multi-line Equations
27109 \begin_layout Standard
27110 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
27111 provides a selection of different formula types.
27113 allows you to choose between
27134 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
27135 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27142 , for an explanation of these formula types.
27145 \begin_layout Chapter
27149 \begin_layout Section
27151 \begin_inset Index idx
27154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27161 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27163 name "sec:Cross-References"
27170 \begin_layout Standard
27171 One of \SpecialChar LyX
27172 's strengths is cross-references.
27173 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
27175 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
27176 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
27177 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
27180 \begin_layout Enumerate
27184 \begin_layout Enumerate
27185 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27187 name "enu:Second-item"
27194 \begin_layout Enumerate
27198 \begin_layout Standard
27199 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
27201 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27204 or by pressing the toolbar button
27211 A gray label box like this:
27212 \begin_inset Graphics
27213 filename clipart/label.png
27217 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
27219 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
27221 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27229 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27234 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27242 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27246 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27250 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27254 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
27255 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
27257 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27265 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27271 \begin_layout Standard
27272 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
27274 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27277 or the toolbar button
27280 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
27284 A gray cross-reference box like this:
27285 \begin_inset Graphics
27286 filename clipart/reference.png
27290 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
27292 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
27293 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27301 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27305 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
27309 \begin_layout Standard
27310 As an alternative to
27312 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27315 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
27320 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
27321 to the actual cursor position via the menu
27323 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27335 \begin_layout Standard
27336 Here is our cross-reference: Item
27337 \begin_inset space ~
27341 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27343 reference "enu:Second-item"
27350 \begin_layout Standard
27351 It is recommended to use a protected space
27355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27356 described in section
27357 \begin_inset space ~
27361 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27363 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
27372 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
27373 line breaks between them.
27376 \begin_layout Standard
27377 There are eight formats of cross-references:
27380 \begin_layout Description
27381 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
27382 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27384 reference "fig:Two-images"
27391 \begin_layout Description
27392 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
27393 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
27395 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27399 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27403 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27405 reference "eq:tanhExp"
27412 \begin_layout Description
27413 <page>: prints the page number: Page
27414 \begin_inset space ~
27418 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27419 LatexCommand pageref
27420 reference "fig:Two-images"
27427 \begin_layout Description
27429 \begin_inset space ~
27433 \begin_inset space ~
27436 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
27437 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27438 LatexCommand vpageref
27439 reference "fig:Two-images"
27444 \begin_inset Newline newline
27447 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
27448 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
27449 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
27450 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
27451 it prints “on the next page”.
27452 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
27455 \begin_layout Description
27457 \begin_inset space ~
27461 \begin_inset space ~
27465 \begin_inset space ~
27468 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
27469 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27471 reference "fig:Two-images"
27476 \begin_inset Newline newline
27479 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
27485 ; otherwise it behaves like
27489 \begin_inset space ~
27493 \begin_inset space ~
27502 \begin_layout Description
27504 \begin_inset space ~
27507 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
27508 \begin_inset Newline newline
27512 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
27515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27520 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27530 \begin_inset Index idx
27533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27535 packages ! prettyref
27541 \begin_inset Index idx
27544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27546 packages ! refstyle
27557 \begin_inset Newline newline
27560 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
27561 -package should be used for this feature by setting
27564 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
27568 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27569 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27577 is the default and preferred because
27581 supports only English documents.
27582 The format is specified by using the command
27594 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27595 preamble of the document.
27596 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
27598 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27606 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27614 \begin_inset Newline newline
27621 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
27626 \begin_inset Newline newline
27637 predefines reference formats for all available types.
27638 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem'
27640 So if you want to make formatted references to, say, Propositions, then
27641 you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
27646 , you might do so as follows:
27647 \begin_inset Newline newline
27654 newrefformat{prop}{Proposition
27659 \begin_inset Newline newline
27662 For more information about defining formatted references, have a look at
27663 the package documentation
27664 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27666 key "prettyref,refstyle"
27672 \begin_inset Newline newline
27683 will be available with formatted references only if you are using the
27690 \begin_layout Description
27692 \begin_inset space ~
27695 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
27696 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27697 LatexCommand nameref
27698 reference "fig:Two-images"
27705 \begin_layout Description
27707 \begin_inset space ~
27710 only: prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27711 label for the reference:
27712 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27713 LatexCommand labelonly
27714 reference "fig:Two-images"
27719 \begin_inset Newline newline
27722 This allows for customization, using \SpecialChar TeX
27723 Code, if you want to issue a command
27724 that \SpecialChar LyX
27730 , then you may want to use the
27733 \begin_inset space ~
27738 option, which will output only the part of the reference following the
27740 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27744 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27748 This is the form needed for e.
27749 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27753 \begin_inset space \space{}
27760 's range commands.The number and current page of the referenced document
27761 part in the output is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
27763 The varieties are adjusted in the field
27767 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
27771 \begin_layout Standard
27772 You can only use the style
27776 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
27780 is always possible.
27783 \begin_layout Standard
27784 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
27785 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
27787 Referencing formulas is explained in section
27788 \begin_inset space ~
27792 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27794 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
27801 \begin_layout Standard
27802 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
27806 \begin_inset space ~
27810 \begin_inset space ~
27815 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
27816 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
27819 \begin_inset space ~
27824 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
27825 You can also go back with the toolbar button
27828 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
27834 \begin_layout Standard
27835 You can change labels at any time.
27836 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
27837 do not need to think about this.
27840 \begin_layout Standard
27841 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
27843 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
27847 \begin_layout Standard
27848 References are described in detail in the section
27849 \begin_inset space ~
27859 \begin_inset space ~
27867 \begin_layout Section
27868 Table of Contents and other Listings
27869 \begin_inset Index idx
27872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27879 \begin_inset Index idx
27882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27883 Navigating ! Outline
27889 \begin_inset Index idx
27892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27899 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27908 \begin_layout Subsection
27910 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27912 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
27919 \begin_layout Standard
27920 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
27922 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27923 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27925 \begin_inset space ~
27929 \begin_inset space ~
27935 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
27937 If you click on it, the
27941 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
27942 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
27943 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
27945 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
27947 \begin_inset space ~
27952 that is described in section
27953 \begin_inset space ~
27957 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27959 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
27966 \begin_layout Standard
27967 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
27968 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
27970 \begin_inset space ~
27974 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27976 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
27980 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
27982 \begin_inset space ~
27986 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27988 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
27992 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
27994 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
27997 \begin_layout Subsection
27998 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
27999 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28001 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
28008 \begin_layout Standard
28009 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
28011 You can insert them via the
28013 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28017 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
28020 \begin_layout Section
28021 URLs and Hyperlinks
28022 \begin_inset Index idx
28025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28032 \begin_inset Index idx
28035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28044 \begin_layout Subsection
28046 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28055 \begin_layout Standard
28056 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
28058 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28064 \begin_layout Standard
28065 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
28067 \begin_inset Flex URL
28070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28080 \begin_layout Standard
28081 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
28087 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
28091 \begin_layout Standard
28092 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28100 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
28109 \begin_layout Subsection
28111 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28113 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
28120 \begin_layout Standard
28121 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
28123 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28126 or with the toolbar button
28133 The appearing dialog has two fields:
28142 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
28143 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
28144 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28146 name "LyX's homepage"
28147 target "http://www.lyx.org"
28152 , an Email address like this:
28153 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28155 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
28156 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
28162 , or a link to a file.
28165 \begin_layout Standard
28166 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
28168 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28176 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28179 to the link target.
28182 \begin_layout Standard
28183 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
28184 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
28185 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
28186 the text style dialog.
28187 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
28191 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28193 name "LyX's homepage"
28194 target "http://www.lyx.org"
28202 \begin_layout Standard
28203 The link text color can be changed, when the option
28207 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
28209 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28210 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28214 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
28216 \begin_inset Newline newline
28224 \begin_inset Newline newline
28231 in the PDF Properties dialog.
28234 \begin_layout Section
28236 \begin_inset Index idx
28239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28246 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28248 name "sec:Appendices"
28255 \begin_layout Standard
28256 Appendices are created with the menu
28258 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28260 \begin_inset space ~
28264 \begin_inset space ~
28270 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
28271 as the appendix part of the book.
28272 This part is marked with a red borderline.
28275 \begin_layout Standard
28276 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
28277 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
28278 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
28279 and the subsection number.
28280 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
28284 \begin_layout Standard
28286 \begin_inset space ~
28290 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28292 reference "chap:Credits"
28297 \begin_inset space ~
28301 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28303 reference "subsec:Export"
28310 \begin_layout Section
28312 \begin_inset Index idx
28315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28322 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28324 name "sec:Bibliography"
28331 \begin_layout Standard
28332 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
28334 You can include a bibliography database, which is explained in sec.
28335 \begin_inset space ~
28339 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28341 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
28348 , or you can insert the bibliography manually, using the paragraph environment
28353 , which is described in the following section (but see also sec.
28354 \begin_inset space ~
28358 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28360 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
28365 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
28366 this document, such as author-year citations, and if you have more than
28367 a handful of references, then you should seriously consider
28371 using a bibliography database.
28374 \begin_layout Standard
28375 In order to demonstrate the difference between these two approaches, we
28376 use two bibliographies in this document, a
28380 environment and a database-generated bibliography.
28381 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
28382 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
28383 In other words, the database approach relieves you, amongst other things,
28384 from the burden to check which entries you have actually cited.
28387 \begin_layout Subsection
28388 The Bibliography Environment
28389 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28391 name "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
28398 \begin_layout Standard
28403 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
28405 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
28414 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
28416 Each entry needs to be given a unique key, which is one word consisting
28417 of ASCII characters only.
28421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28423 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28426 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set"
28432 \begin_inset Newline newline
28436 \begin_inset Flex URL
28439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28441 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII
28453 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
28456 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28460 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28463 , a short form of its title, as the key.
28466 \begin_layout Standard
28467 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
28469 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28472 or the toolbar button
28475 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
28479 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
28480 containing the available citations.
28481 Select one or more keys from the list and
28491 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
28492 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
28496 \begin_layout Standard
28497 Citation references appear in the output as the number of the bibliography
28498 entry with surrounding brackets.
28503 for the entry, the label will appear instead of the number.
28504 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
28506 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28510 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28516 \begin_layout Standard
28520 Companion Second Edition
28523 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28525 key "latexcompanion"
28533 \begin_layout Standard
28534 The \SpecialChar LyX
28535 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
28536 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28546 \begin_layout Standard
28547 You can also produce author-year or author-number citations, using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28554 \begin_inset Index idx
28557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28565 In order to do so, the label needs to be given the form
28566 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28570 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28574 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28577 Author A and Author B(Year)
28578 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28585 a blank between the author(s) and the opening parenthesis that delimits
28587 Then, if you select
28590 \begin_inset space ~
28595 in the document settings
28596 \begin_inset Index idx
28599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28600 Document ! Settings
28607 Bibliography\SpecialChar menuseparator
28609 \begin_inset space ~
28615 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28617 reference "subsec:Citation-Format"
28624 ), you can select between different author-year or author-number styles.
28627 \begin_layout Standard
28628 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
28631 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28633 \begin_inset space ~
28641 arg "layout-paragraph"
28645 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
28648 \begin_layout Subsection
28649 Bibliography databases
28650 \begin_inset Index idx
28653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28654 Bibliography ! Databases
28660 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28662 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
28669 \begin_layout Standard
28670 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same references in different
28675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28676 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
28678 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
28679 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
28684 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
28686 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
28687 your working field in a database.
28688 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
28689 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
28690 list for that document.
28691 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
28695 \begin_layout Standard
28696 The database is a text file with the file extension
28697 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28705 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28708 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
28709 The format is explained in
28710 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28717 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28719 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28721 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
28727 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
28728 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
28729 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
28731 \begin_inset Flex URL
28734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28736 http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
28744 \begin_layout Standard
28746 supports two different approaches to use bibliography databases in a document.
28747 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28748 is the classic technique that has been the only way to use such databases
28750 It is quite established and mature and there is a huge range of existing
28752 But it has its drawbacks, especially when it comes to more complex bibliographi
28753 c needs and support for specific languages and scripts.
28754 Those are addressed by
28759 \begin_inset Index idx
28762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28764 packages ! biblatex
28770 It reads the same database format than Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28771 (although it has been significantly
28772 extended beyond Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28782 can handle any classic Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28783 database, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28784 might conversely fail to correctly
28785 handle databases that use specific
28794 , but it uses a different framework to generate citations and references
28798 \begin_layout Standard
28799 To select if Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28804 should be used, set in the document settings (menu
28806 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28810 \begin_inset Index idx
28813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28814 Document ! Settings
28826 \begin_inset space ~
28831 to a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28839 \begin_layout Subsubsection
28840 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28842 \begin_inset Index idx
28845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28846 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28855 \begin_layout Standard
28856 To access a database via Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28859 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28864 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
28866 \begin_inset space ~
28872 A window will appear in which you can add one or more databases and select
28873 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28881 Add bibliography to TOC
28883 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
28888 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
28889 in the document or just the cited references.
28892 \begin_layout Standard
28893 The Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28894 style file is a text file with the file extension
28895 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28903 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28906 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
28907 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
28908 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
28909 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
28911 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
28916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28917 For information on how this is done, have a look at
28918 \begin_inset Newline newline
28922 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28924 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
28934 In this document we used the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28939 , which provides an alpha-numeric style in accordance with the German Standards
28943 \begin_layout Standard
28944 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
28947 \begin_layout Subsubsection
28949 \begin_inset Index idx
28952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28953 Bibliography ! Biblatex
28959 \begin_inset Index idx
28962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28964 packages ! biblatex
28972 \begin_layout Standard
28973 Accessing a database via
28977 is almost identical to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28980 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28985 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
28987 \begin_inset space ~
28993 In contrary to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28994 you cannot select a
28999 The other dialog options are the same as with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29003 \begin_layout Standard
29008 has two different style files: a bibliography style file (text file with
29010 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29018 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29021 ) controls how the bibliography entries will look like and a citation style
29022 file (text file with the file extension
29023 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29031 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29034 ) controls the look of the citation references in the text.
29035 Usually such style files come in pairs and it makes sense to use matching
29037 It is nevertheless possible to mix any citation style with any bibliography
29041 \begin_layout Standard
29046 styles are not set in the
29049 \begin_inset space ~
29054 dialog, but in the document settings.
29055 \begin_inset Index idx
29058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29059 Document ! Settings
29064 However, in the dialog in the
29068 field, which is only visible if you use
29072 , you can enter options that determine how the bibliography is printed (for
29073 example how its heading will appear).
29074 These options are deescribed in detail in the
29079 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29089 \begin_layout Standard
29090 Inserting a citation reference works as described in section
29091 \begin_inset space ~
29095 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29097 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
29107 \begin_layout Subsubsection
29108 Bibliography Processors
29111 \begin_layout Standard
29112 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
29113 uses a bibliography processor,
29114 that is an external program that reads the database, sorts the citations
29115 and processes the data in a way it can be included in the document.
29116 The classic program is called Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29118 It has the advantage that it is very mature and widespread, but the disadvantag
29119 e that it has severe limitations, due to its age.
29122 \begin_layout Standard
29123 Meanwhile, some alternatives have been developed that address some of these
29125 LyX natively supports some of them and lets you select a custom processor.
29126 You can do this on a general level in
29128 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29129 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29130 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29133 or for individual documents in
29135 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29136 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29140 The following variants are available by default:
29143 \begin_layout Description
29144 biber a specific, modern processor
29145 \begin_inset Index idx
29148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29155 developed exclusively for
29159 (it does not work with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29165 provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory and many specific features
29170 makes use of; if you use the
29174 approach, it is strongly recommended to use
29181 \begin_layout Description
29182 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
29183 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
29184 with all bibliography packages, although it will probably fail with
29188 bibliographies due to the limited memory.
29191 \begin_layout Description
29192 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding
29193 (but no Unicode support), larger memory than
29197 , works with all bibliography packages, although more complex
29201 bibliographies will exceed its limits, and not all
29205 features are supported.
29208 \begin_layout Standard
29209 By default (with the
29215 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29216 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29229 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29230 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29231 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29234 ), \SpecialChar LyX
29235 selects an appropriate (available) processor for the current bibliography
29248 for Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29249 -based bibliography styles).
29250 This should suit most needs.
29253 \begin_layout Standard
29254 In Japanese documents, a specific processor is used.
29255 By default this is pBib\SpecialChar TeX
29256 (in \SpecialChar LyX
29261 ), a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29262 variant specifically aimed at Japanese.
29263 You can adjust it in
29265 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29266 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29267 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29273 \begin_layout Standard
29274 Selected bibliography processors can be controlled with options that you
29275 can add below the selection.
29276 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
29277 of Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29283 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29293 \begin_layout Subsubsection
29297 \begin_layout Standard
29299 supports some specific tasks such as sectioned bibliographies and multiple
29301 These are explained in detail in section
29303 Customizing Bibliographies
29307 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29312 Additional Features
29317 \begin_layout Subsection
29319 \begin_inset Index idx
29322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29323 Bibliography ! Citation format
29329 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29331 name "subsec:Citation-Format"
29338 \begin_layout Standard
29339 Many different citation formats are common, e.
29340 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29344 \begin_inset space \space{}
29347 numerical citation (as
29348 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29352 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29355 like in this document), alpha-numerical citations (as
29356 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29360 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29363 ) or author-year citations (as
29364 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29368 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29373 supports these formats via specific citation packages and their style
29377 \begin_layout Standard
29378 By default a simple numeric citation style is used.
29381 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29382 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29386 \begin_inset Index idx
29389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29390 Document ! Settings
29395 you have a range of other options, depending on your preferred bibliography
29401 environment your only choice besides manual formatting of the bibliography
29402 labels, is there to use
29405 \begin_inset space ~
29416 \begin_inset space ~
29421 which gives you author-year and author-numerical citations (see above
29422 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29424 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
29431 \begin_layout Standard
29432 With a bibliography database (see
29433 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29435 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
29442 ) one has in contrary to the
29446 environment full access to the formatting styles.
29447 These style formats are available:
29450 \begin_layout Description
29452 \begin_inset space ~
29455 (BibTeX) the default Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29456 -based approached without any additional packages
29457 (simple numeric citations).
29460 \begin_layout Description
29461 Biblatex loads the package
29466 \begin_inset Index idx
29469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29471 packages ! biblatex
29476 and lets you select a style in the dropdown boxes
29478 Biblatex citation style
29482 Biblatex bibliography style
29485 Options to the package
29489 can be entered in the
29496 \begin_layout Description
29498 \begin_inset space ~
29502 \begin_inset space ~
29505 mode) loads the package
29509 with the natbib compatibility mode.
29510 This is a specific variant for users who switch an existing document that
29522 behavior very closely.
29527 this option has some additional styles.
29532 styles are also supported by this variant.
29535 \begin_layout Description
29537 \begin_inset space ~
29540 (BibTeX) loads the package
29545 \begin_inset Index idx
29548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29555 which provides author-year styles particularly suited for law studies.
29558 \begin_layout Description
29560 \begin_inset space ~
29563 (BibTeX) loads the package
29568 \begin_inset Index idx
29571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29578 which provides citation styles particularly suited for the humanities.
29581 \begin_layout Standard
29590 style formats provide the choice between author-year and author-numerical
29592 You have to select one style in the dropdown box
29601 formats, this only affects the appearance in the \SpecialChar LyX
29603 Whether the output uses numerical, author-year or another format such as
29604 alpha-numerical depends only on the selected
29606 Biblatex citation style
29609 However, when switching between Author-year and Author-number, a suitable
29615 , on the other hand, the dialog selection will ultimately determine the
29619 \begin_layout Standard
29620 For any author-year and author-numerical selection, multiple style variants
29621 are available in the
29626 Some selections also provide further options like the option to uppercase
29627 a name prefix such as
29628 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29632 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29636 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29640 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29643 ) or to expand or reduce the number of displayed others (i.
29644 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29648 \begin_inset space \space{}
29652 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29656 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29663 \begin_layout Standard
29664 In the citation dialog you can also set text to appear after a citation
29666 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29670 page numbers, which will then be formatted according to the style's needs
29672 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29677 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29681 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29685 Here is a simple example where the text
29686 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29690 \begin_inset space ~
29694 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29697 appears after the reference:
29700 \begin_layout Quote
29702 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29705 key "latexcompanion"
29713 \begin_layout Standard
29714 All styles except for
29718 also provide the feature to add text that precedes the reference (such
29720 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29724 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29728 This text is then also included in the parentheses, if the style requires
29732 \begin_layout Standard
29733 Note that these pre- and postnotes apply to the whole citation.
29734 So if you refer to multiple references at once, the prenote will precede
29735 the first citation in the list, the postnote will follow the last.
29740 styles allow to add pre- and postnotes to any individual reference in a
29741 multi-citation (so-called
29742 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29745 qualified citation lists
29746 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29752 If you use such a style and if the current reference includes multiple
29757 dialog will display three columns in the field
29764 \begin_inset space ~
29772 \begin_inset space ~
29780 \begin_inset space ~
29786 If you double-click on an item's
29789 \begin_inset space ~
29797 \begin_inset space ~
29802 field, you can add such individual pre- and postnotes.
29805 General text before
29811 fields you can add pre- and postnotes that apply to the whole list.
29814 \begin_layout Section
29816 \begin_inset Index idx
29819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29826 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29835 \begin_layout Standard
29836 An index entry is created if you use the menu
29838 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29840 \begin_inset space ~
29845 or the toolbar button
29852 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
29853 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
29854 by \SpecialChar LyX
29855 as the index entry.
29858 \begin_layout Standard
29859 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
29861 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29862 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
29864 \begin_inset space ~
29870 A light blue box labeled
29871 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29879 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29882 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
29883 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
29887 \begin_layout Standard
29888 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
29889 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
29890 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
29891 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29893 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29895 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
29903 \begin_layout Subsection
29904 Grouping Index Entries
29905 \begin_inset Index idx
29908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29917 \begin_layout Standard
29918 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
29920 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
29921 lists under the entry
29922 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29926 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29930 First we create the entry
29931 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29935 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29939 \begin_inset space ~
29943 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29945 reference "subsec:Lists"
29950 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
29951 \begin_inset space ~
29955 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29957 reference "sec:Itemize"
29961 , we insert the command
29964 \begin_layout Standard
29970 \begin_layout Standard
29974 \begin_layout Standard
29980 \begin_layout Standard
29981 for the enumerated list in section
29982 \begin_inset space ~
29986 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29988 reference "sec:Enumerate"
29995 \begin_layout Standard
29996 The exclamation mark
29997 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30001 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30004 marks the grouping levels.
30005 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
30006 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
30007 If we don't have an index entry for
30008 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30012 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30015 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
30018 \begin_layout Subsection
30020 \begin_inset Index idx
30023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30024 Index ! Page ranges
30032 \begin_layout Standard
30033 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
30035 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
30036 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
30037 an index entry in section
30038 \begin_inset space ~
30042 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30044 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
30051 \begin_layout Standard
30054 Paragraph environments|(
30057 \begin_layout Standard
30058 and another entry at the end of section
30059 \begin_inset space ~
30063 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30065 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
30072 \begin_layout Standard
30075 Paragraph environments|)
30078 \begin_layout Standard
30080 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30088 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30092 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30100 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30103 respectively start and end the index range.
30104 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
30105 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
30106 the pages of the indexed document parts.
30107 An example is the index entry
30108 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30111 Document ! Settings
30112 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30118 \begin_layout Subsection
30120 \begin_inset Index idx
30123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30124 Index ! Cross referencing
30132 \begin_layout Standard
30133 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
30134 We referred for example in the index entry
30135 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30139 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30143 \begin_inset space ~
30147 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30149 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
30153 ) to the index entry
30154 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30158 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30161 in the same section using the entry
30164 \begin_layout Standard
30167 GIF|see{Image formats}
30170 \begin_layout Standard
30171 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
30173 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
30174 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
30177 \begin_layout Subsection
30179 \begin_inset Index idx
30182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30183 Index ! Entry order
30191 \begin_layout Standard
30192 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
30193 follow the rules for the index order.
30194 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
30199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30200 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
30202 \begin_inset space ~
30206 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30208 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
30217 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
30218 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
30219 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30223 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30227 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30231 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30235 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30239 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30243 \begin_inset Index idx
30246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30247 Dummy entries ! maïs
30253 \begin_inset Index idx
30256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30257 Dummy entries ! maître
30263 \begin_inset Index idx
30266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30267 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
30272 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
30273 maïs, maison, maître.
30274 To achieve this, we use the command
30277 \begin_layout Standard
30280 previous entry@current entry
30283 \begin_layout Standard
30284 In our case we want to have
30285 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30289 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30293 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30297 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30300 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
30303 \begin_layout Standard
30309 \begin_layout Standard
30310 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
30311 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
30313 See the next subsection for an example.
30316 \begin_layout Subsection
30318 \begin_inset Index idx
30321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30322 Index ! Entry layout
30330 \begin_layout Standard
30331 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
30332 \begin_inset Index idx
30335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30338 This is an italic dummy entry
30343 You can also format the page number using the character
30344 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30348 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30351 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30352 -command without a backslash.
30353 We can write for example
30356 \begin_layout Standard
30359 italic page number:|textit
30362 \begin_layout Standard
30363 to get the page number in italic.
30364 \begin_inset Index idx
30367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30368 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
30373 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
30374 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
30376 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30384 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30392 \begin_inset space ~
30398 Have a look at section
30399 \begin_inset space ~
30403 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30405 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
30409 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30413 \begin_layout Standard
30414 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30422 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
30426 to generate the index, see section
30427 \begin_inset space ~
30431 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30433 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
30442 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
30447 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
30448 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30451 key "latexcompanion"
30464 \begin_layout Standard
30465 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
30467 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
30468 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
30469 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
30470 If so, put the following in the preamble
30473 \begin_layout Standard
30485 \begin_layout Standard
30489 \begin_layout Standard
30495 \begin_layout Standard
30496 in the index entry.
30497 \begin_inset Index idx
30500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30501 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
30506 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
30507 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
30508 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
30511 \begin_layout Standard
30512 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
30513 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
30514 a bold font for all index entries.
30515 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
30527 documentation for details,
30528 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30530 key "makeindex,xindy"
30538 \begin_layout Subsection
30540 \begin_inset Index idx
30543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30550 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30552 name "subsec:Index-Program"
30559 \begin_layout Standard
30560 If the index generation program
30564 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
30565 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
30569 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
30570 distribution, is used.
30574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30579 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
30580 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
30581 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
30582 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
30583 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
30593 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
30595 dialog, see section
30596 \begin_inset space ~
30600 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30602 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
30607 The available options are listed and explained in
30608 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30610 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
30616 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
30620 \begin_layout Standard
30621 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
30622 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
30625 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30626 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30630 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
30631 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
30634 \begin_layout Subsection
30638 \begin_layout Standard
30639 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
30640 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
30641 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30645 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30648 next to the standard index.
30650 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
30651 that add this feature.
30658 \begin_inset Index idx
30661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30663 packages ! splitidx
30668 package to generate multiple indexes.
30669 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
30674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30675 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
30677 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30685 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30686 style, but it also includes
30687 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
30688 Please consult the package's manual for details.
30696 \begin_layout Standard
30697 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
30698 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
30700 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30701 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30704 and select the option
30706 Use multiple Indexes
30713 already contains the standard index
30714 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30718 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30722 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
30723 also appear as a heading) to the
30727 input field and press the
30732 The new index now also appears in the list.
30733 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
30734 label color to the new index.
30737 \begin_layout Standard
30738 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
30741 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30748 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
30749 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
30750 are additional features:
30753 \begin_layout Itemize
30754 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
30755 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
30758 \begin_layout Itemize
30759 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
30760 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
30761 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30765 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30768 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
30769 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
30770 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
30771 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
30774 \begin_layout Section
30775 Nomenclature/Glossary
30776 \begin_inset Index idx
30779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30786 \begin_inset Index idx
30789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30818 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30820 name "sec:Nomenclature"
30827 \begin_layout Standard
30828 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
30829 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
30830 called nomenclature or glossary.
30833 \begin_layout Standard
30834 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30841 \begin_inset Index idx
30844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30852 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
30854 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30861 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
30865 \begin_layout Standard
30866 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
30867 and then use the menu
30869 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30875 \begin_inset space ~
30880 or the toolbar button
30883 arg "nomencl-insert"
30888 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30896 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30899 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
30902 \begin_layout Standard
30903 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
30904 The first is the term or
30908 that you wish to define.
30913 of the term or symbol.
30916 \begin_layout Standard
30917 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30925 You have to enter valid \SpecialChar LaTeX
30926 -code for all fields of the nomenclature dialog.
30934 \begin_layout Subsection
30935 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
30936 \begin_inset Index idx
30939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30940 Nomenclature ! Layout
30948 \begin_layout Standard
30949 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
30953 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
30956 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30960 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
30964 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30968 \begin_inset Newline newline
30976 \begin_inset Newline newline
30982 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30986 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30989 character starts/ends the formula.
30990 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
30991 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
30993 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30999 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31003 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
31013 \begin_layout Standard
31014 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31015 -syntax is given in section
31016 \begin_inset space ~
31020 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31022 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
31029 \begin_layout Standard
31033 \begin_inset space ~
31038 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
31040 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
31041 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31045 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31049 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31052 in this document is:
31053 \begin_inset Newline newline
31058 dummy entry for the character
31063 \begin_inset Newline newline
31075 \begin_inset space ~
31085 font use the command
31114 \begin_layout Standard
31115 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
31116 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31120 \begin_inset space \space{}
31124 \begin_inset Newline newline
31140 \begin_inset Newline newline
31143 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
31144 This command will make the font of all symbols
31151 \begin_inset space ~
31159 \begin_layout Standard
31160 If the characters |
31161 \begin_inset space \space{}
31165 \begin_inset space \space{}
31169 \begin_inset space \space{}
31173 \begin_inset space \space{}
31177 \begin_inset space \space{}
31180 should appear in nomenclature entries they need to be escaped by adding
31181 a quote character in front of them.
31182 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
31183 LatexCommand nomenclature
31184 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
31185 description "The quote sign is output by writing ‘ \"\"\"\" '"
31193 \begin_layout Subsection
31194 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
31195 \begin_inset Index idx
31198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31199 Nomenclature ! Sort order
31207 \begin_layout Standard
31208 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31209 -code of the symbol
31211 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
31213 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
31216 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
31217 LatexCommand nomenclature
31219 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
31227 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31231 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
31232 LatexCommand nomenclature
31235 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
31241 They will be sorted by
31242 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31250 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31254 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31264 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31268 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31271 will be sorted before the
31275 since the character
31276 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31280 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31283 is considered in sorting.
31286 \begin_layout Standard
31287 To control the sort order, you can edit the
31290 \begin_inset space ~
31295 field of the nomenclature dialog.
31296 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
31298 For the example given, you can insert
31302 in this field for the
31303 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31310 will be located before
31311 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31317 \begin_layout Standard
31318 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
31323 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31333 \begin_layout Subsection
31334 Nomenclature Options
31335 \begin_inset Index idx
31338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31339 Nomenclature ! Options
31347 \begin_layout Standard
31352 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
31353 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
31356 \begin_layout Description
31357 refeq Appends the phrase
31358 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31370 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31373 to every nomenclature entry, where
31379 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
31382 \begin_layout Description
31383 refpage Appends the phrase
31384 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31396 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31399 to every nomenclature entry, where
31405 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
31408 \begin_layout Description
31409 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
31412 \begin_layout Standard
31413 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
31414 class options list in the
31416 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31420 In this document the options
31427 \begin_layout Standard
31428 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
31434 \begin_layout Standard
31435 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
31436 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
31441 field in the nomenclature dialog:
31444 \begin_layout Description
31454 \begin_layout Description
31457 nomrefpage Like the
31464 \begin_layout Description
31467 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
31476 \begin_layout Description
31480 \begin_inset space ~
31486 \begin_inset space ~
31491 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
31494 \begin_layout Standard
31496 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31500 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31503 are automatically translated for some document languages.
31504 If not, add these lines to your \SpecialChar LaTeX
31508 \begin_layout Standard
31516 eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation
31519 \begin_inset Newline newline
31526 pagedeclaration}[1]{, page
31531 \begin_inset Newline newline
31535 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31539 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31543 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31547 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31550 by their translation.
31553 \begin_layout Subsection
31554 Printing the Nomenclature
31555 \begin_inset Index idx
31558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31559 Nomenclature ! Printing
31567 \begin_layout Standard
31568 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
31570 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31571 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
31576 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31584 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31587 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
31588 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
31589 You can choose between these settings:
31592 \begin_layout Description
31593 Default a space of 1
31594 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31600 \begin_layout Description
31602 \begin_inset space ~
31606 \begin_inset space ~
31609 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
31612 \begin_layout Description
31613 Custom custom space
31616 \begin_layout Standard
31617 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
31618 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31622 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31626 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
31634 For example, in order to change the name to
31638 , add the following line to the preamble:
31641 \begin_layout Standard
31649 nomname}{List of Symbols}
31652 \begin_layout Subsection
31653 Nomenclature Program
31654 \begin_inset Index idx
31657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31658 Nomenclature ! Program
31664 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31666 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
31673 \begin_layout Standard
31679 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
31680 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
31682 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
31687 by adding options, see section
31688 \begin_inset space ~
31692 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31694 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
31699 The available options are listed and explained in
31700 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31702 key "nomencl,makeindex"
31710 \begin_layout Section
31712 \begin_inset Index idx
31715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31722 \begin_inset Index idx
31725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31726 Document ! Branches
31732 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31734 name "sec:Branches"
31741 \begin_layout Standard
31742 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
31743 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
31744 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
31745 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
31748 \begin_layout Standard
31749 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
31750 allows you to put text into branches.
31751 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
31752 To create a branch, either select the menu
31754 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31755 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
31758 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
31760 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31767 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
31768 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
31769 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
31770 and whether the name of the branch should
31771 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
31772 (see below for an example).
31773 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
31774 to the name of the other) and to add
31775 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31779 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31783 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31787 \begin_inset space ~
31790 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
31791 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
31794 \begin_layout Standard
31795 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
31796 These boxes are inserted via the menu
31798 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31801 where you can choose a branch.
31802 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
31806 \begin_layout Standard
31807 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
31808 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
31811 \begin_layout Standard
31812 \begin_inset Branch Question
31816 \begin_layout Standard
31821 Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
31829 \begin_layout Standard
31830 \begin_inset Branch Answer
31834 \begin_layout Standard
31839 Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
31847 \begin_layout Standard
31854 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31855 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31858 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
31859 Consider for example a file
31860 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31864 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31867 which has the above branches.
31869 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31873 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31876 is active, the PDF export file would be called
31877 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31881 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31885 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31889 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31893 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31897 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31900 branch were inactive,
31901 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31905 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31909 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31913 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31916 branch was active, likewise
31917 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31921 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31925 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31929 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31932 branch was active, and
31933 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31936 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
31937 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31940 if both branches were active.
31941 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
31942 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
31948 \begin_layout Standard
31949 There are also inverted branch insets, whose content is output just in case
31955 This make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
31956 To control whether a particular inset is inverted, right-click on the inset
31960 \begin_inset space ~
31968 \begin_layout Standard
31969 \begin_inset Branch Answer
31973 \begin_layout Standard
31979 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31983 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31986 branch is deactivated.
31992 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
31998 \begin_layout Standard
31999 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
32000 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
32001 definitions for each branch.
32002 For example you can define for the question branch
32006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32007 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32008 -syntax, see section
32009 \begin_inset space ~
32013 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32015 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
32027 \begin_layout Standard
32037 \begin_layout Standard
32047 \begin_layout Standard
32048 and for the answer branch
32051 \begin_layout Standard
32061 \begin_layout Standard
32071 \begin_layout Standard
32072 \begin_inset Branch Question
32076 \begin_layout Standard
32080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32108 \begin_layout Standard
32109 \begin_inset Branch Answer
32113 \begin_layout Standard
32117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32145 \begin_layout Standard
32146 Now it is possible to use the
32150 question{\SpecialChar ldots
32157 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
32160 commands to obtain conditional output.
32161 Here is an example formula where only the
32168 \begin_inset Formula
32170 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
32178 \begin_layout Standard
32179 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
32187 \begin_layout Standard
32188 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
32190 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32194 \begin_inset space \space{}
32197 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
32199 For this advanced usage, see the
32205 Flex insets and InsetLayout
32210 \begin_layout Section
32212 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32214 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
32219 \begin_inset Index idx
32222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32231 \begin_layout Standard
32234 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32235 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32238 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
32240 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32246 \begin_inset Index idx
32249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32251 packages ! hyperref
32256 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
32257 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
32258 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
32259 part of the document.
32263 \begin_layout Standard
32264 The header information in the dialog tab
32268 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
32269 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
32270 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
32271 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
32275 \begin_inset space ~
32279 \begin_inset space ~
32284 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
32285 tries to extract the header information from your document title
32286 and author entries.
32290 \begin_inset space ~
32294 \begin_inset space ~
32298 \begin_inset space ~
32303 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
32306 \begin_layout Standard
32307 You can specify in the dialog tab
32311 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
32316 \begin_inset space ~
32320 \begin_inset space ~
32324 \begin_inset space ~
32329 option allows long links to be split;
32332 \begin_inset space ~
32336 \begin_inset space ~
32340 \begin_inset space ~
32348 \begin_inset space ~
32353 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
32356 \begin_inset space ~
32361 colors the different links.
32362 The default colors are:
32365 \begin_layout Labeling
32366 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
32371 for hyperlinks and URLs
32374 \begin_layout Labeling
32375 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
32383 \begin_layout Labeling
32384 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
32392 \begin_layout Standard
32393 but you can change these in the field
32398 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
32401 \begin_layout Standard
32404 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
32407 \begin_layout Standard
32412 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
32413 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
32414 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
32417 \begin_layout Standard
32422 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
32423 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
32424 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
32434 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
32435 when opening the PDF.
32437 \begin_inset space ~
32440 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
32441 \begin_inset space ~
32444 1 will only display the sections.
32447 \begin_layout Standard
32448 PDF properties are also used in this document.
32449 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
32455 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
32456 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32466 \begin_layout Section
32468 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32470 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32472 name "sec:TeX-Code"
32479 \begin_layout Subsection
32482 \begin_inset Index idx
32485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32493 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32495 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
32502 \begin_layout Standard
32503 As \SpecialChar LyX
32504 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
32505 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
32506 commands and constructs,
32509 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
32510 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
32511 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
32512 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32513 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
32514 cannot support all packages and
32518 \begin_layout Standard
32519 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
32520 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
32521 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
32525 Code box is created by the menu
32527 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32529 \begin_inset space ~
32534 or by the toolbar button
32547 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
32555 \begin_layout Standard
32556 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
32558 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
32560 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word
32564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32565 The LyX way would be to use a framed box.
32570 and are therefore using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32577 , you can write the command part
32583 in a \SpecialChar TeX
32584 Code box before the word and the closing brace
32588 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
32589 Code box behind the word.
32590 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
32591 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
32595 \begin_layout Standard
32596 \begin_inset Graphics
32597 filename clipart/ERT.png
32605 \begin_layout Standard
32609 \begin_layout Standard
32610 This is a line with a
32614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32637 \begin_layout Standard
32638 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32646 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
32647 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
32648 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
32649 know that the command is finished.
32657 \begin_layout Subsection
32658 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32660 \begin_inset Argument 1
32663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32664 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
32671 \begin_inset Index idx
32674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32682 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32684 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
32691 \begin_layout Standard
32692 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
32693 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32694 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
32695 uses in the background.
32696 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
32697 is based on commands, you can
32698 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32702 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32706 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
32707 any time if you know the right commands.
32708 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
32709 is the end of the day.
32710 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
32711 all caption labels bold.
32712 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
32714 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
32718 \begin_layout Standard
32719 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
32721 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32723 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32726 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32736 \begin_layout Standard
32737 As result you find that the package
32742 \begin_inset Index idx
32745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32753 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
32755 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32758 \SpecialChar menuseparator
32762 \begin_inset space ~
32770 \begin_layout Standard
32775 usepackage[options]{package name}
32778 \begin_layout Standard
32779 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
32780 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
32781 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
32782 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
32785 \begin_layout Standard
32786 In your case the package name is
32791 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
32796 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
32797 So you add the command
32800 \begin_layout Standard
32805 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
32808 \begin_layout Standard
32809 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
32813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32814 For more commands provided by the
32818 package, have a look at its documentation,
32819 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32834 \begin_layout Standard
32835 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
32837 For example if you use a
32841 class, you don't need the package
32845 , you can instead write
32848 \begin_layout Standard
32853 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
32858 \begin_layout Standard
32859 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
32860 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
32861 documentation of the document class you want to use.
32868 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
32871 \begin_layout Standard
32872 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
32873 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
32875 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32876 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
32877 Code box as described in the previous
32881 \begin_layout Standard
32882 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
32883 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32886 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32888 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
32896 \begin_layout Standard
32897 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
32903 \begin_layout Standard
32907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32917 \begin_inset Note Note
32920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32921 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
32929 \begin_layout Left Header
32930 \begin_inset Argument 1
32933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32953 \begin_inset Note Note
32956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32957 defines the header line as described below
32965 \begin_layout Center Header
32966 \begin_inset Argument 1
32969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32978 \begin_layout Right Header
32979 \begin_inset Argument 1
32982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33003 \begin_layout Left Footer
33004 \begin_inset Argument 1
33007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33028 \begin_layout Center Footer
33029 \begin_inset Argument 1
33032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33044 \begin_inset Newline newline
33048 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
33054 \begin_layout Right Footer
33055 \begin_inset Argument 1
33058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33080 \begin_layout Section
33081 Customized Page Headers and Footers
33082 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33084 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
33089 \begin_inset Index idx
33092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33093 Document ! Header/Footer line
33099 \begin_inset Index idx
33102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33111 \begin_layout Standard
33112 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
33116 \begin_inset space ~
33127 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33133 \begin_inset space ~
33139 As a second step add in the menu
33141 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33142 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33146 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33151 Custom Header/Footerlines
33154 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33158 This module offers the following 6
33159 \begin_inset space ~
33165 \begin_layout Description
33167 \begin_inset space ~
33171 \begin_inset space ~
33175 \begin_inset space ~
33179 \begin_inset space ~
33183 \begin_inset space ~
33189 \begin_layout Description
33191 \begin_inset space ~
33195 \begin_inset space ~
33199 \begin_inset space ~
33203 \begin_inset space ~
33207 \begin_inset space ~
33213 \begin_layout Standard
33214 for the different positions in the header/footer.
33215 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
33218 \begin_layout Standard
33219 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
33220 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
33222 \begin_inset space ~
33226 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33228 reference "fig:Page-layout"
33232 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
33235 \begin_layout Standard
33236 \begin_inset Float figure
33242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33245 \begin_inset Tabular
33246 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
33247 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
33248 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
33249 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
33250 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
33252 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33261 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
33264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33270 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33281 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33290 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33299 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33310 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
33313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33314 The normal text on the page goes here.
33315 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
33317 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
33318 the chapter, company logo but you can use almost anything, except of floats.
33323 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33332 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33343 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33361 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33372 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
33384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33390 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33408 \begin_inset Caption Standard
33410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33411 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33413 name "fig:Page-layout"
33417 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
33430 \begin_layout Standard
33431 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33439 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
33443 \begin_inset space ~
33448 is set to “Default”.
33449 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
33458 \begin_layout Subsection
33462 \begin_layout Standard
33463 To define your header line, add all three header environments.
33464 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages, the
33465 things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
33466 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
33468 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty, nothing appears
33470 Defining the footer line works similarly.
33473 \begin_layout Standard
33474 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
33475 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
33479 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33481 \begin_inset space ~
33489 \begin_layout Description
33492 thepage prints the current page number
33495 \begin_layout Description
33498 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
33501 \begin_layout Description
33504 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
33507 \begin_layout Description
33510 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
33511 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
33514 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33518 \begin_inset Quotes prd
33521 because it usually goes in a left header.
33524 \begin_layout Description
33527 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
33528 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
33530 It is normally used in the right header.
33533 \begin_layout Subsection
33534 Default header/footer
33537 \begin_layout Standard
33538 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
33539 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
33540 footer has the page number.
33541 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
33542 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
33543 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
33546 \begin_inset space ~
33554 \begin_layout Subsection
33558 \begin_layout Standard
33559 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
33560 Some pages are different.
33561 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own, and so does
33562 any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
33563 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
33564 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
33565 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
33568 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33569 Header and footer decoration line
33572 \begin_layout Standard
33573 By default, you get a 0.4
33574 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33577 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
33578 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
33590 in the following way:
33593 \begin_layout Standard
33600 headrulewidth}{thickness}
33603 \begin_layout Standard
33604 where thickness is a size in standard units like
33617 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
33618 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33624 \begin_layout Standard
33625 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
33627 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
33628 \begin_inset space ~
33632 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33642 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33643 Several header/footer lines
33646 \begin_layout Standard
33647 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
33648 this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
33649 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the height of
33651 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33666 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33667 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33669 \begin_inset space ~
33677 \begin_layout Standard
33684 headheight}{height}
33687 \begin_layout Standard
33692 is a size in standard units (e.
33693 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33697 \begin_inset space \space{}
33705 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height, define your
33706 header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
33707 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33708 logfile with the menu
33710 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33712 \begin_inset space ~
33720 \begin_inset space ~
33725 to see if you can find a warning about the package
33730 \begin_inset Index idx
33733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33735 packages ! fancyhdr
33741 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
33742 for your header/footer.
33745 \begin_layout Subsection
33749 \begin_layout Standard
33750 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
33751 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
33752 This example consists of the following definition:
33755 \begin_layout Description
33757 \begin_inset space ~
33766 , empty optional argument
33769 \begin_layout Description
33771 \begin_inset space ~
33774 Header empty, empty optional argument
33777 \begin_layout Description
33779 \begin_inset space ~
33788 in the optional argument
33791 \begin_layout Description
33793 \begin_inset space ~
33802 in the optional argument
33805 \begin_layout Description
33807 \begin_inset space ~
33820 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33824 \begin_inset Newline newline
33828 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
33832 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33835 in the optional argument
33838 \begin_layout Description
33840 \begin_inset space ~
33849 , empty optional argument
33852 \begin_layout Description
33855 headrulewidth set to 2
33856 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33862 \begin_layout Standard
33863 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
33864 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
33870 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33880 \begin_layout Standard
33881 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
33887 \begin_layout Standard
33891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33895 pagestyle{headings}
33901 \begin_inset Note Note
33904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33905 switches back to page style with the default headings
33913 \begin_layout Section
33914 Previewing Snippets of your Document
33915 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33917 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
33922 \begin_inset Index idx
33925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33932 \begin_inset Index idx
33935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33944 \begin_layout Standard
33946 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
33947 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
33948 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
33951 \begin_layout Subsection
33955 \begin_layout Standard
33956 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33962 \begin_inset Index idx
33965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33967 packages ! preview-latex
33972 (on some systems named simply
33977 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
33979 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33986 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
33988 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
33996 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
33997 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33998 -package are automatically
33999 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
34003 \begin_layout Subsection
34007 \begin_layout Standard
34008 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
34009 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
34011 activate the option
34014 \begin_inset space ~
34021 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34027 \begin_inset space ~
34031 \begin_inset space ~
34034 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
34041 \begin_inset space ~
34054 \begin_inset space ~
34059 is the multiplication factor for the size.
34062 \begin_layout Standard
34063 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
34068 \begin_inset space ~
34076 \begin_inset space ~
34084 \begin_layout Standard
34085 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
34086 and when you finish
34090 \begin_layout Standard
34091 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34099 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
34100 generated by activating the option
34103 \begin_inset space ~
34109 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
34117 \begin_layout Subsection
34118 Selected document parts
34121 \begin_layout Standard
34122 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
34123 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
34124 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
34125 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
34127 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
34129 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34133 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
34134 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
34135 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
34138 \begin_layout Standard
34139 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34146 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
34151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34158 is explained in section
34160 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
34165 \begin_inset space ~
34175 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
34176 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
34177 the final rotated boxes,
34178 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
34179 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
34181 Here is the result:
34184 \begin_layout Standard
34185 \begin_inset Preview
34187 \begin_layout Standard
34192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34196 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
34202 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
34212 height_special "totalheight"
34217 backgroundcolor "none"
34220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34245 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
34251 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
34258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34273 \begin_layout Standard
34274 Previewing works also for colors.
34275 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34294 is explained in section
34301 \begin_inset space ~
34314 \begin_layout Standard
34315 \begin_inset Preview
34317 \begin_layout Standard
34321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34340 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
34345 This is text within a colored, framed box.
34349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34364 \begin_layout Standard
34365 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
34371 \begin_layout Standard
34372 If \SpecialChar LyX
34373 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
34374 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
34375 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
34376 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34377 packages in your document preamble that are required by
34378 the \SpecialChar TeX
34380 If \SpecialChar LyX
34381 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
34382 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
34384 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
34385 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
34386 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
34389 \begin_layout Subsection
34394 \begin_layout Standard
34395 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34396 source of the whole document or parts of it.
34399 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
34401 \begin_inset space ~
34406 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34408 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
34410 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
34411 's main window, then only this selection
34412 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
34413 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
34414 the source view window.
34419 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
34420 ; but note that if you have
34421 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
34423 not just the one which is open at the time.
34426 \begin_layout Section
34427 Advanced Find and Replace
34428 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34430 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
34435 \begin_inset Index idx
34438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34445 \begin_inset Index idx
34448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34457 \begin_layout Subsection
34461 \begin_layout Standard
34462 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
34463 allows for searching of complex,
34464 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
34466 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
34467 The key-features are:
34470 \begin_layout Itemize
34471 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
34472 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
34473 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
34477 \begin_layout Itemize
34478 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
34479 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
34480 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
34481 a section heading will only be found within section headings
34484 \begin_layout Itemize
34485 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
34486 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
34487 outside of mathematics environments
34490 \begin_layout Itemize
34491 Search may be widened to a specific
34496 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34500 \begin_inset space ~
34503 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
34504 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
34511 \begin_layout Itemize
34512 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
34513 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
34514 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34518 \begin_inset space ~
34521 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
34524 \begin_layout Subsection
34528 \begin_layout Standard
34529 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
34531 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
34544 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
34547 ) or the toolbar button
34550 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
34556 Advanced Find and Replace
34561 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34565 \begin_layout Standard
34571 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
34575 \begin_inset space ~
34580 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
34583 arg "paragraph-break"
34587 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
34588 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
34592 arg "paragraph-break"
34595 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
34599 searches backwards.
34602 \begin_layout Standard
34606 \begin_inset space ~
34611 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
34620 \begin_inset space ~
34625 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
34628 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34629 Searching for mathematics
34632 \begin_layout Standard
34633 Mathematical formulas, such as
34634 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
34637 or something more complex like
34638 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
34641 , may be searched for by typing them in the
34646 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
34647 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
34648 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
34649 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
34655 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34659 \begin_layout Standard
34660 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
34661 This is done by switching to the
34665 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
34670 This way, entering in the
34677 \begin_layout Itemize
34678 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
34679 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
34682 \begin_layout Itemize
34683 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
34684 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
34687 \begin_layout Itemize
34688 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
34689 of it only within section headings.
34690 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
34691 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
34695 \begin_layout Itemize
34696 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
34697 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
34700 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34704 \begin_layout Standard
34705 The entries made in the
34709 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
34712 \begin_inset space ~
34718 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
34722 button or alternatively press
34725 arg "paragraph-break"
34732 while the cursor is in the
34735 \begin_inset space ~
34743 \begin_layout Standard
34744 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
34746 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
34750 \begin_layout Itemize
34751 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
34752 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
34753 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34757 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34760 with its typewriter version
34761 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34769 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34775 \begin_layout Itemize
34776 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
34778 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34782 \begin_inset Formula $R$
34786 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34790 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34794 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
34798 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34801 (you may want to enable the
34804 \begin_inset space ~
34812 \begin_inset space ~
34817 options and disable the
34825 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
34826 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34830 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34833 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
34834 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
34838 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
34841 , or occurrences of
34842 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
34846 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
34852 \begin_layout Subsection
34856 \begin_layout Standard
34857 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
34861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34862 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
34864 \begin_inset CommandInset href
34866 target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
34876 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
34882 This is done with the context menu
34884 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34885 Insert Regular Expression
34887 while the cursor is in the
34892 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
34893 expression matching rules
34897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34898 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
34901 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34905 \begin_inset space ~
34908 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
34909 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
34915 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
34916 same text in the document.
34917 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
34918 Examples of using such a feature may be:
34921 \begin_layout Enumerate
34922 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
34927 editor the fraction
34928 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
34932 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
34935 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
34936 fractions with the given denominator.
34939 \begin_layout Enumerate
34940 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
34952 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
34957 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
34958 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
34959 Also, by inserting a
34960 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
34963 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
34964 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
34967 \begin_layout Standard
34968 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
34969 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
34970 \begin_inset Formula $()$
34973 , and referring back to them through
34974 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
34978 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
34982 For example, try searching with the regexp
34983 \begin_inset Newline newline
34986 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
34989 \begin_inset Newline newline
34992 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
34995 \begin_layout Standard
34996 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
34999 \begin_layout Standard
35000 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35008 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
35009 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
35010 sub-expressions is absolute.
35012 \begin_inset space ~
35016 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
35019 always refers to the first occurrence of
35020 \begin_inset Formula $()$
35023 in all entered regexps.
35031 \begin_layout Section
35033 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35035 name "sec:Spellchecking"
35040 \begin_inset Index idx
35043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35052 \begin_layout Standard
35054 has a built-in spell checker.
35057 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35064 key or the toolbar button
35067 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
35070 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
35071 beginning of the currently selected text.
35072 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
35073 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
35074 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
35075 scrolled so that it is visible.
35076 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
35077 n, if any could be found.
35078 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
35082 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
35083 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
35086 \begin_layout Standard
35087 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
35090 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35094 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
35095 a different one at the top of the dialog.
35097 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
35098 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
35101 \begin_inset space ~
35109 arg "dialog-show character"
35112 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
35114 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
35117 \begin_layout Standard
35118 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
35119 can be downloaded from here:
35120 \begin_inset Newline newline
35124 \begin_inset Flex URL
35127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35129 http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
35135 \begin_inset Newline newline
35139 \begin_inset space ~
35142 files for each language.
35143 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
35144 \begin_inset space ~
35147 files into \SpecialChar LyX
35148 's installation subfolder
35156 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
35158 \begin_inset Newline newline
35161 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
35162 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
35163 but in most cases these are
35179 is the language code.
35182 \begin_layout Subsection
35186 \begin_layout Standard
35189 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35190 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35192 \begin_inset space ~
35195 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35198 you can set the following things:
35201 \begin_layout Description
35203 \begin_inset space ~
35206 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
35207 should use for spell checking.
35208 Depending on your platform,
35222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35223 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
35224 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
35239 \begin_inset space ~
35242 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
35245 \begin_layout Description
35247 \begin_inset space ~
35250 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
35251 will always use the given language
35252 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
35255 \begin_layout Description
35257 \begin_inset space ~
35260 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
35262 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35266 \begin_inset space \space{}
35270 This should normally not be needed.
35273 \begin_layout Description
35275 \begin_inset space ~
35279 \begin_inset space ~
35282 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
35284 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35288 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35294 \begin_layout Description
35296 \begin_inset space ~
35299 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
35300 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
35301 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
35302 appear in a context menu.
35303 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
35307 \begin_layout Description
35309 \begin_inset space ~
35313 \begin_inset space ~
35317 \begin_inset space ~
35320 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
35324 \begin_layout Section
35326 \begin_inset Index idx
35329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35336 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35338 name "sec:Thesaurus"
35345 \begin_layout Standard
35347 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
35348 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
35357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35358 \begin_inset CommandInset href
35360 target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
35370 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
35372 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
35373 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
35374 which are available for many languages.
35377 \begin_layout Standard
35378 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
35379 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
35383 \begin_layout Subsection
35384 Setting up the thesaurus
35387 \begin_layout Standard
35396 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
35400 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
35405 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
35407 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35411 \begin_inset space ~
35419 For instance, the US English files are named:
35422 \begin_layout Itemize
35426 \begin_layout Itemize
35430 \begin_layout Standard
35439 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
35440 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
35443 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35444 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35445 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
35447 \begin_inset space ~
35452 ) to the path where they are installed.
35456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35457 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
35458 ies, typical locations are
35464 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
35468 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
35472 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
35475 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
35481 LibreOffice-<Version>
35488 On the Mac, the default location is
35490 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
35491 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
35492 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
35493 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
35494 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
35495 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
35503 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
35504 during the \SpecialChar LyX
35505 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
35509 \begin_layout Standard
35510 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
35511 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
35515 \begin_layout Itemize
35516 \begin_inset Flex URL
35519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35521 http://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
35529 \begin_layout Standard
35530 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
35531 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
35533 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35534 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35535 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
35537 \begin_inset space ~
35542 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
35544 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
35545 and point \SpecialChar LyX
35549 \begin_layout Standard
35550 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
35552 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
35555 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
35561 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
35564 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
35565 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
35567 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35573 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35574 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35575 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
35577 \begin_inset space ~
35582 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
35585 \begin_layout Subsection
35586 Using the thesaurus
35589 \begin_layout Standard
35590 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
35592 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35595 or the toolbar button
35598 arg "thesaurus-entry"
35601 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
35603 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
35605 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
35606 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
35607 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
35616 ), related terms (such as
35619 \begin_inset space ~
35628 ), compounds (such as
35631 \begin_inset space ~
35640 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
35649 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
35652 \begin_layout Standard
35653 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
35654 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
35658 \begin_layout Standard
35659 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
35660 the dictionary, such as the above
35664 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
35665 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35669 \begin_inset space \space{}
35672 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
35673 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
35674 For example, looking up the word form
35678 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
35683 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
35684 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35688 \begin_inset space \space{}
35699 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
35700 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
35701 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
35704 \begin_layout Section
35706 \begin_inset Index idx
35709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35716 \begin_inset Index idx
35719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35720 Document ! Change Tracking
35726 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35728 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
35735 \begin_layout Standard
35736 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
35737 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
35738 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
35739 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
35741 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35743 \begin_inset space ~
35746 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
35748 \begin_inset space ~
35756 \begin_layout Standard
35757 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
35771 The color depends on the author that made the change.
35772 You can change the color in
35774 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35775 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35777 \begin_inset space ~
35781 \begin_inset space ~
35786 \SpecialChar menuseparator
35792 \begin_inset Index idx
35795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35796 Color ! Change tracking
35801 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
35802 's status bar when the
35803 cursor is in changed text.
35804 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
35807 arg "changes-merge"
35813 \begin_layout Standard
35814 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
35816 \begin_inset Index idx
35819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35828 \begin_layout Standard
35829 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
35835 \begin_layout Standard
35836 \begin_inset Graphics
35837 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
35845 \begin_layout Standard
35846 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
35852 \begin_layout Standard
35853 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
35856 \begin_layout Standard
35857 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
35863 \begin_layout Standard
35864 \begin_inset Tabular
35865 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
35866 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
35867 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
35868 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
35869 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
35870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35878 arg "changes-track"
35886 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35892 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35894 \begin_inset space ~
35897 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
35899 \begin_inset space ~
35908 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
35909 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35917 arg "changes-output"
35925 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35931 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35933 \begin_inset space ~
35936 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
35938 \begin_inset space ~
35942 \begin_inset space ~
35946 \begin_inset space ~
35955 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
35956 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35972 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35976 Jumps to the next change
35982 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
35983 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35991 arg "change-accept"
35999 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36005 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36007 \begin_inset space ~
36010 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36012 \begin_inset space ~
36021 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36022 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36030 arg "change-reject"
36038 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36044 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36046 \begin_inset space ~
36049 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36051 \begin_inset space ~
36060 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36061 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36069 arg "changes-merge"
36077 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36083 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36085 \begin_inset space ~
36088 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36090 \begin_inset space ~
36099 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36100 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36108 arg "all-changes-accept"
36116 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36122 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36124 \begin_inset space ~
36127 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36129 \begin_inset space ~
36133 \begin_inset space ~
36142 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36143 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36151 arg "all-changes-reject"
36159 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36165 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36167 \begin_inset space ~
36170 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36172 \begin_inset space ~
36176 \begin_inset space ~
36185 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36186 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36208 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36209 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
36211 \begin_inset space ~
36220 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36221 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36237 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36243 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
36245 \begin_inset space ~
36261 \begin_layout Standard
36262 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36268 \begin_layout Standard
36269 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
36289 \begin_layout Standard
36290 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
36291 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
36292 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
36293 the next change after the current cursor position.
36294 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
36295 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
36296 step to the next change.
36297 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
36300 \begin_layout Standard
36301 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
36302 to describe a change.
36305 \begin_layout Standard
36306 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36312 \begin_inset Index idx
36315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36323 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
36325 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36332 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
36336 \begin_layout Section
36337 Comparison of Documents
36338 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36340 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
36345 \begin_inset Index idx
36348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36349 Comparison of documents
36357 \begin_layout Standard
36358 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
36361 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36365 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
36366 file with change tracking enabled showing the
36368 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
36370 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
36374 \begin_inset space ~
36378 \begin_inset space ~
36382 \begin_inset space ~
36391 \begin_inset space ~
36395 \begin_inset space ~
36399 \begin_inset space ~
36403 \begin_inset space ~
36407 \begin_inset space ~
36411 \begin_inset space ~
36416 enables the change tracking option
36419 \begin_inset space ~
36423 \begin_inset space ~
36427 \begin_inset space ~
36432 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
36435 \begin_layout Section
36436 International Support
36437 \begin_inset Index idx
36440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36441 International support
36449 \begin_layout Standard
36450 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
36451 with any language you want.
36452 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
36453 up \SpecialChar LyX
36455 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36457 key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese"
36465 \begin_layout Standard
36466 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
36467 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
36468 \begin_inset space ~
36472 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36474 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
36481 \begin_layout Subsection
36483 \begin_inset Index idx
36486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36493 \begin_inset Index idx
36496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36497 Document ! Settings
36503 \begin_inset Index idx
36506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36507 Document ! Language
36515 \begin_layout Standard
36518 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36519 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36522 dialog lets you set
36524 the language, the quote style and character encoding
36529 \begin_layout Standard
36534 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
36539 \begin_inset space ~
36544 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
36545 For details about the different encoding options see section
36546 \begin_inset space ~
36550 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36552 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
36559 \begin_layout Subsection
36560 Keyboard mapping configuration
36561 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36563 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
36570 \begin_layout Standard
36571 If you have for example a U.
36572 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36575 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
36576 can use an alternate keymap.
36577 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
36582 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36583 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36584 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
36587 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
36588 \begin_inset space ~
36592 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36594 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
36599 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
36600 which one you want to use.
36603 \begin_layout Standard
36604 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
36605 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
36606 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
36607 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36610 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
36611 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
36612 one to support the characters you want.
36613 This and many other customizations are explained in the
36620 \begin_layout Chapter
36623 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36625 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
36632 \begin_layout Standard
36633 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
36634 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
36635 topic inside the user's guide.
36638 \begin_layout Section
36640 \begin_inset Index idx
36643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36652 \begin_layout Standard
36657 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
36660 \begin_layout Subsection
36664 \begin_layout Standard
36665 Creates a new document.
36668 \begin_layout Subsection
36672 \begin_layout Standard
36673 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
36674 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
36675 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
36678 \begin_layout Subsection
36682 \begin_layout Standard
36686 \begin_layout Subsection
36690 \begin_layout Standard
36691 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
36692 Click there on a file to open it.
36695 \begin_layout Subsection
36699 \begin_layout Standard
36700 Closes the current document.
36703 \begin_layout Subsection
36707 \begin_layout Standard
36708 Closes all opened documents.
36711 \begin_layout Subsection
36715 \begin_layout Standard
36716 Saves the actual document.
36719 \begin_layout Subsection
36723 \begin_layout Standard
36724 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
36727 \begin_layout Subsection
36731 \begin_layout Standard
36732 Saves all opened documents.
36735 \begin_layout Subsection
36739 \begin_layout Standard
36740 Reloads the actual document from disk.
36743 \begin_layout Subsection
36747 \begin_layout Standard
36748 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
36749 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
36750 It is described in the section
36752 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
36757 Additional Features
36762 \begin_layout Subsection
36766 \begin_layout Standard
36767 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
36768 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
36770 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
36771 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
36775 \begin_layout Standard
36776 When using the menu entry
36779 \begin_inset space ~
36784 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
36788 \begin_inset space ~
36792 \begin_inset space ~
36796 \begin_inset space ~
36801 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
36802 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
36805 \begin_layout Subsection
36807 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36809 name "subsec:Export"
36816 \begin_layout Standard
36817 You can export your document to various file formats.
36818 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
36820 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
36821 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
36822 during its configuration.
36825 \begin_layout Standard
36826 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
36828 \begin_inset space ~
36832 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36834 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
36841 \begin_layout Description
36847 \begin_inset space ~
36850 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
36852 \begin_inset space ~
36855 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
36856 \begin_inset Newline newline
36859 Since \SpecialChar LyX
36860 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
36864 \begin_layout Description
36865 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
36871 \begin_layout Description
36873 \begin_inset space ~
36876 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
36882 \begin_layout Description
36883 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
36884 's native DVI-format.
36885 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
36886 files paths or file names in your document.
36888 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
36895 \begin_layout Description
36896 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
36897 in files paths or file names
36900 \begin_layout Description
36902 \begin_inset space ~
36909 ) DVI-format using the program
36911 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
36914 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
36918 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36926 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
36934 \begin_layout Description
36936 \begin_inset space ~
36939 (cropped) the same as
36943 but with cropped page margins.
36946 \begin_layout Description
36948 \begin_inset space ~
36951 Dot text file with code in the programming language
36955 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
36960 \begin_layout Description
36964 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36972 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
36980 \begin_layout Description
36982 \begin_inset space ~
36986 \begin_inset space ~
36989 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
36993 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
37001 \begin_layout Description
37005 \begin_inset space ~
37014 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37015 source that is compilable with the program
37017 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
37021 \begin_layout Description
37025 \begin_inset space ~
37030 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37031 source, additionally all images used in the document
37032 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
37036 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
37039 \begin_layout Description
37043 \begin_inset space ~
37048 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37049 source code, additionally all images used in the document
37050 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
37058 \begin_layout Description
37062 \begin_inset space ~
37071 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37072 source that is compilable with the program
37078 \begin_layout Description
37080 \begin_inset space ~
37084 \begin_inset space ~
37091 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37092 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
37098 \begin_layout Description
37100 \begin_inset space ~
37103 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
37104 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
37106 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37110 \begin_inset space \space{}
37115 \begin_inset space ~
37119 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37123 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37127 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37131 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37134 represent the version number)
37137 \begin_layout Description
37139 \begin_inset space ~
37143 \begin_inset space ~
37146 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
37147 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
37148 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
37152 \begin_layout Description
37153 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
37154 's internal XHTML engine
37157 \begin_layout Description
37159 \begin_inset space ~
37163 \begin_inset space ~
37167 \begin_inset space ~
37171 \begin_inset space ~
37174 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
37179 For the conversion the program
37188 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
37191 \begin_layout Description
37192 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
37197 \begin_layout Description
37199 \begin_inset space ~
37202 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
37204 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
37207 For the conversion the program
37216 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
37219 \begin_layout Description
37221 \begin_inset space ~
37224 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
37225 For the conversion the program
37234 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
37237 \begin_layout Description
37239 \begin_inset space ~
37242 (cropped) the same as
37245 \begin_inset space ~
37250 but with cropped page margins
37253 \begin_layout Description
37257 \begin_inset space ~
37262 PDF-format using the program
37266 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
37269 \begin_layout Description
37273 \begin_inset space ~
37277 \begin_inset space ~
37285 \begin_inset space ~
37290 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
37291 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37295 \begin_inset space \space{}
37298 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
37302 \begin_layout Description
37306 \begin_inset space ~
37311 PDF-format using the program
37313 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
37316 , produces PDF-files directly
37319 \begin_layout Description
37323 \begin_inset space ~
37328 PDF-format using the program
37332 , produces PDF-files directly
37335 \begin_layout Description
37339 \begin_inset space ~
37344 PDF-format using the program
37348 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
37351 \begin_layout Description
37355 \begin_inset space ~
37360 PDF-format using the program
37365 , produces PDF-files directly
37368 \begin_layout Description
37372 \begin_inset space ~
37380 \begin_layout Description
37384 \begin_inset space ~
37388 \begin_inset space ~
37393 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
37394 and then exported as text using the program
37399 \begin_layout Description
37404 PostScript format using the program
37412 options see section
37413 \begin_inset space ~
37417 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37419 reference "subsec:General-output"
37426 \begin_layout Description
37427 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37428 source and also code in the statistical programming
37442 it is possible to use
37446 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
37450 \begin_layout Standard
37451 If one of the menu entries
37458 \begin_inset space ~
37467 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37469 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
37471 \begin_inset space ~
37475 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37477 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37482 \begin_inset Index idx
37485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37486 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
37495 \begin_layout Subsection
37499 \begin_layout Standard
37500 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
37501 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
37504 \begin_inset space ~
37508 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37510 reference "sec:Paths"
37515 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
37524 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
37525 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
37526 's preferences as described in section
37527 \begin_inset space ~
37531 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37533 reference "subsec:Converters"
37540 \begin_layout Subsection
37541 New and Close Window
37544 \begin_layout Standard
37545 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
37549 \begin_layout Subsection
37553 \begin_layout Standard
37554 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
37557 \begin_layout Section
37559 \begin_inset Index idx
37562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37571 \begin_layout Subsection
37575 \begin_layout Standard
37576 Described in section
37577 \begin_inset space ~
37581 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37583 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
37590 \begin_layout Subsection
37591 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
37594 \begin_layout Standard
37595 Described in section
37596 \begin_inset space ~
37600 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37602 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
37609 \begin_layout Subsection
37613 \begin_layout Standard
37614 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
37615 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
37618 \begin_layout Subsection
37622 \begin_layout Standard
37623 Selects the whole document.
37626 \begin_layout Subsection
37627 Find & Replace (Quick)
37630 \begin_layout Standard
37631 Described in section
37632 \begin_inset space ~
37636 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37638 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
37645 \begin_layout Subsection
37646 Find & Replace (Advanced)
37649 \begin_layout Standard
37650 Described in section
37651 \begin_inset space ~
37655 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37657 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
37664 \begin_layout Subsection
37665 Move Paragraph Up/Down
37668 \begin_layout Standard
37669 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
37673 \begin_layout Subsection
37677 \begin_layout Standard
37678 Described in section
37679 \begin_inset space ~
37683 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37685 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
37692 \begin_layout Subsection
37694 \begin_inset Index idx
37697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37698 Paragraph ! Settings
37706 \begin_layout Standard
37707 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
37708 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
37712 \begin_layout Standard
37713 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
37714 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
37720 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37721 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37723 \begin_inset space ~
37731 \begin_layout Subsection
37732 Table and Rows & Columns
37735 \begin_layout Standard
37736 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
37737 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
37738 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
37741 \begin_layout Subsection
37745 \begin_layout Standard
37746 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
37747 It will dissolve this inset.
37748 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
37752 \begin_layout Subsection
37756 \begin_layout Standard
37757 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
37758 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
37761 \begin_layout Subsection
37762 Increase/Decrease List Depth
37765 \begin_layout Standard
37766 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
37768 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
37769 \begin_inset space ~
37773 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37775 reference "sec:Nesting"
37780 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37782 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
37789 \begin_layout Subsection
37792 Start New Environment/Start New Parent Environment
37795 \begin_layout Standard
37796 These menus are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive environme
37797 nts of the same type.
37799 \begin_inset space ~
37803 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37805 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
37809 for an explanation.
37812 \begin_layout Section
37814 \begin_inset Index idx
37817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37826 \begin_layout Standard
37827 At the bottom of the
37831 menu the opened documents are listed.
37834 \begin_layout Subsection
37835 Open/Close all Insets
37838 \begin_layout Standard
37839 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
37842 \begin_layout Subsection
37843 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
37846 \begin_layout Standard
37847 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
37850 \begin_layout Standard
37851 Math macros are described in the
37858 \begin_layout Subsection
37862 \begin_layout Standard
37863 Shows the outline window as described in sections
37864 \begin_inset space ~
37868 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37870 reference "sec:Navigating"
37875 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37877 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
37884 \begin_layout Subsection
37888 \begin_layout Standard
37889 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
37891 \begin_inset space ~
37895 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37897 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
37904 \begin_layout Subsection
37908 \begin_layout Standard
37909 Opens a window showing console messages.
37910 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
37912 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37915 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
37916 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
37917 is processing the document.
37920 \begin_layout Subsection
37922 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37924 name "subsec:Toolbars"
37929 \begin_inset Index idx
37932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37941 \begin_layout Standard
37942 In this menu entry you can set the appearance of the different toolbars.
37943 All toolbars and the
37946 \begin_inset space ~
37951 can be turned on and off.
37956 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
37968 \begin_inset space ~
37980 \begin_inset space ~
37985 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
37989 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
37996 \begin_layout Standard
38001 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
38005 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
38006 or when a certain feature is enabled.
38007 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
38008 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
38009 is inside a formula or table respectively.
38012 \begin_layout Standard
38014 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
38015 \begin_inset space ~
38019 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38021 reference "sec:Toolbars"
38028 \begin_layout Subsection
38032 \begin_layout Standard
38036 \begin_inset space ~
38040 \begin_inset space ~
38044 \begin_inset space ~
38048 \begin_inset space ~
38052 \begin_inset space ~
38056 \begin_inset space ~
38061 will split \SpecialChar LyX
38062 's main window vertically while
38065 \begin_inset space ~
38069 \begin_inset space ~
38073 \begin_inset space ~
38077 \begin_inset space ~
38081 \begin_inset space ~
38085 \begin_inset space ~
38090 will split it horizontally.
38091 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
38092 to view the same document, but at different positions.
38093 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
38094 three or more documents at the same time.
38095 To close a split view, use the menu
38098 \begin_inset space ~
38102 \begin_inset space ~
38110 \begin_layout Subsection
38114 \begin_layout Standard
38115 Closes a split view.
38118 \begin_layout Subsection
38122 \begin_layout Standard
38123 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
38124 so that you will see nothing but your text.
38125 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
38126 's main window fullscreen.
38127 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
38128 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
38131 \begin_layout Section
38133 \begin_inset Index idx
38136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38145 \begin_layout Subsection
38149 \begin_layout Standard
38150 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
38151 \begin_inset space ~
38155 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38157 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
38168 \begin_layout Subsection
38170 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38172 name "subsec:Special-Character"
38179 \begin_layout Standard
38180 Here you can insert the following characters:
38183 \begin_layout Description
38188 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
38191 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
38192 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38193 -packages you have installed.
38194 You can get a complete display by checking
38197 \begin_inset space ~
38203 \begin_inset Newline newline
38207 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38215 Not all characters will be visible in the
38219 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
38220 dialog (see section
38221 \begin_inset space ~
38225 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38227 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
38231 ) can display every character.
38239 \begin_layout Description
38240 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
38244 \begin_layout Description
38246 \begin_inset space ~
38250 \begin_inset space ~
38253 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
38254 \begin_inset space ~
38258 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38260 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
38267 \begin_layout Description
38269 \begin_inset space ~
38272 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
38275 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38276 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38282 \begin_layout Description
38284 \begin_inset space ~
38287 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
38290 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38291 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38297 \begin_layout Description
38299 \begin_inset space ~
38302 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
38306 \begin_layout Description
38308 \begin_inset space ~
38311 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
38315 \begin_layout Description
38317 \begin_inset space ~
38320 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
38326 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
38332 \begin_layout Description
38334 \begin_inset space ~
38337 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
38341 \begin_layout Description
38343 \begin_inset space ~
38347 \begin_inset Index idx
38350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38357 \begin_inset Index idx
38360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38361 Language ! Phonetic symbols
38366 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
38367 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
38369 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38375 \begin_inset Index idx
38378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38386 \begin_inset Newline newline
38389 More information about this feature can be found in the
38395 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
38401 \begin_layout Description
38402 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
38404 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
38405 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
38409 \begin_layout Subsection
38413 \begin_layout Standard
38414 Opens a submenu with the following options:
38417 \begin_layout Description
38418 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
38419 \begin_inset script superscript
38421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38430 \begin_layout Description
38431 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
38432 \begin_inset script subscript
38434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38443 \begin_layout Description
38445 \begin_inset space ~
38448 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
38449 \begin_inset space ~
38453 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38455 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
38462 \begin_layout Description
38464 \begin_inset space ~
38467 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
38468 \begin_inset space ~
38472 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38474 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
38481 \begin_layout Description
38483 \begin_inset space ~
38486 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
38487 \begin_inset space ~
38491 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38493 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
38500 \begin_layout Description
38502 \begin_inset space ~
38505 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
38507 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38511 \begin_inset space \space{}
38514 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
38515 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
38521 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38524 To insert a fraction use the command
38529 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
38533 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
38539 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38542 The visible space is hereby the character before the
38549 \begin_layout Description
38551 \begin_inset space ~
38554 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
38555 \begin_inset space ~
38559 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38561 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
38568 \begin_layout Description
38570 \begin_inset space ~
38573 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
38574 \begin_inset space ~
38578 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38580 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
38587 \begin_layout Description
38589 \begin_inset space ~
38592 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
38593 \begin_inset space ~
38597 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38599 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
38606 \begin_layout Description
38607 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
38608 \begin_inset space ~
38612 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38614 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
38621 \begin_layout Description
38623 \begin_inset space ~
38626 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
38627 \begin_inset space ~
38631 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38633 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
38640 \begin_layout Description
38642 \begin_inset space ~
38645 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
38646 \begin_inset space ~
38650 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38652 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
38659 \begin_layout Description
38661 \begin_inset space ~
38665 \begin_inset space ~
38668 Break Inserts a line break point (zero-width space character) that is invisible
38671 \begin_inset space ~
38675 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38677 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
38684 for a usage example.
38687 \begin_layout Description
38689 \begin_inset space ~
38693 \begin_inset space ~
38696 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
38697 \begin_inset space ~
38701 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38703 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
38710 \begin_layout Description
38712 \begin_inset space ~
38715 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
38716 as described in section
38717 \begin_inset space ~
38721 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38723 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
38730 \begin_layout Description
38732 \begin_inset space ~
38735 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
38736 \begin_inset space ~
38740 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38742 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
38749 \begin_layout Description
38751 \begin_inset space ~
38754 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
38755 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
38757 \begin_inset space ~
38761 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38763 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
38770 \begin_layout Description
38772 \begin_inset space ~
38775 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
38776 \begin_inset space ~
38780 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38782 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
38789 \begin_layout Description
38791 \begin_inset space ~
38795 \begin_inset space ~
38798 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
38799 \begin_inset space ~
38803 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38805 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
38812 \begin_layout Subsection
38816 \begin_layout Standard
38817 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
38821 \begin_inset space ~
38842 are described in section
38843 \begin_inset space ~
38847 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38849 reference "sec:toc"
38858 is described in section
38859 \begin_inset space ~
38863 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38865 reference "sec:Index"
38873 is described in section
38874 \begin_inset space ~
38878 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38880 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
38886 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
38889 is described in section
38890 \begin_inset space ~
38894 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38896 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
38903 \begin_layout Subsection
38907 \begin_layout Standard
38908 To insert floats, as described in section
38909 \begin_inset space ~
38913 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38915 reference "sec:Floats"
38919 and in detail the chapter
38926 \begin_inset space ~
38934 \begin_layout Subsection
38938 \begin_layout Standard
38939 To insert notes, described in section
38940 \begin_inset space ~
38944 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38946 reference "sec:Notes"
38953 \begin_layout Subsection
38957 \begin_layout Standard
38958 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
38960 Branches are described in section
38961 \begin_inset space ~
38965 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38967 reference "sec:Branches"
38974 \begin_layout Subsection
38978 \begin_layout Standard
38979 Inserts document class-specific insets.
38980 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
38982 An example is the document class
38983 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38987 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38990 with three custom insets.
38993 Flex insets and InsetLayout
38997 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
39003 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
39006 \begin_layout Subsection
39008 \begin_inset Index idx
39011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39020 \begin_layout Standard
39021 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
39023 For more information see chapter
39025 External Document Parts
39028 \begin_inset space ~
39034 \begin_layout Subsection
39036 \begin_inset Index idx
39039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39048 \begin_layout Standard
39049 Inserts a box in a certain style.
39050 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
39057 \begin_inset space ~
39065 \begin_layout Subsection
39069 \begin_layout Standard
39074 dialog as described in section
39075 \begin_inset space ~
39079 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39081 reference "sec:Bibliography"
39088 \begin_layout Subsection
39092 \begin_layout Standard
39097 as described in section
39098 \begin_inset space ~
39102 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39104 reference "sec:Cross-References"
39111 \begin_layout Subsection
39115 \begin_layout Standard
39120 as described in section
39121 \begin_inset space ~
39125 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39127 reference "sec:Cross-References"
39134 \begin_layout Subsection
39136 \begin_inset Index idx
39139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39146 \begin_inset Index idx
39149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39150 Tables ! Multi-page ! Caption
39158 \begin_layout Standard
39159 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
39160 Floats are described in section
39161 \begin_inset space ~
39165 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39167 reference "sec:Floats"
39171 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
39173 Multi-page Captions
39178 \begin_inset space ~
39186 \begin_layout Subsection
39190 \begin_layout Standard
39191 Inserts an index entry as described in section
39192 \begin_inset space ~
39196 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39198 reference "sec:Index"
39205 \begin_layout Subsection
39209 \begin_layout Standard
39210 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
39211 \begin_inset space ~
39215 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39217 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
39224 \begin_layout Subsection
39228 \begin_layout Standard
39229 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
39230 Tables are described in section
39231 \begin_inset space ~
39235 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39237 reference "sec:Tables"
39241 and in detail in the chapter
39248 \begin_inset space ~
39256 \begin_layout Subsection
39260 \begin_layout Standard
39266 Graphics are described in section
39267 \begin_inset space ~
39271 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39273 reference "sec:Graphics"
39280 \begin_layout Subsection
39284 \begin_layout Standard
39285 Inserts a URL as described in section
39286 \begin_inset space ~
39290 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39292 reference "subsec:URLs"
39299 \begin_layout Subsection
39303 \begin_layout Standard
39304 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
39305 \begin_inset space ~
39309 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39311 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
39318 \begin_layout Subsection
39322 \begin_layout Standard
39323 Inserts a footnote as described in section
39324 \begin_inset space ~
39328 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39330 reference "sec:Footnotes"
39337 \begin_layout Subsection
39341 \begin_layout Standard
39342 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
39343 \begin_inset space ~
39347 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39349 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
39356 \begin_layout Subsection
39360 \begin_layout Standard
39361 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
39362 title or caption of a float.
39363 Inserts a short title as described in section
39364 \begin_inset space ~
39368 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39370 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
39377 \begin_layout Subsection
39382 \begin_layout Standard
39383 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
39384 Code box as described in section
39385 \begin_inset space ~
39389 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39391 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
39398 \begin_layout Subsection
39400 \begin_inset Index idx
39403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39412 \begin_layout Standard
39413 Inserts a program listings box.
39414 Program listings are explained in the chapter
39416 Program Code Listings
39421 \begin_inset space ~
39429 \begin_layout Subsection
39433 \begin_layout Standard
39434 Inserts the actual date.
39435 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
39440 \begin_layout Subsection
39444 \begin_layout Standard
39445 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
39446 \begin_inset space ~
39450 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39452 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
39459 \begin_layout Section
39461 \begin_inset Index idx
39464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39473 \begin_layout Standard
39474 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
39475 \begin_inset space ~
39478 of the current document.
39479 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
39482 \begin_layout Subsection
39486 \begin_layout Standard
39487 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
39488 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
39489 to jump, for example, between section
39490 \begin_inset space ~
39494 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
39495 \begin_inset space ~
39498 2.5 and use the submenu
39501 \begin_inset space ~
39505 \begin_inset space ~
39512 \begin_inset space ~
39518 \begin_inset space ~
39522 \begin_inset space ~
39528 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
39532 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
39538 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
39541 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
39544 \begin_layout Standard
39545 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
39549 \begin_inset space ~
39554 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
39557 \begin_inset space ~
39562 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
39565 \begin_layout Subsection
39566 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
39569 \begin_layout Standard
39570 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
39574 \begin_layout Subsection
39578 \begin_layout Standard
39579 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
39580 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
39581 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
39585 \begin_inset space ~
39589 \begin_inset space ~
39597 \begin_layout Subsection
39601 \begin_layout Standard
39602 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
39605 The \SpecialChar LyX
39606 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
39608 \begin_inset space ~
39616 \begin_inset space ~
39621 manual for a detailed description.
39624 \begin_layout Section
39626 \begin_inset Index idx
39629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39638 \begin_layout Subsection
39642 \begin_layout Standard
39643 Change Tracking is described in section
39644 \begin_inset space ~
39648 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39650 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
39657 \begin_layout Subsection
39665 \begin_layout Standard
39666 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
39667 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
39668 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39670 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
39671 to the clipboard or update the view.
39672 \begin_inset Newline newline
39675 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
39679 \begin_layout Standard
39682 Open Containing Directory
39684 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
39685 's temporary folder for the document.
39686 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
39687 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
39688 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
39689 For example some journals require to send the
39693 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
39697 \begin_layout Subsection
39698 Start Appendix Here
39701 \begin_layout Standard
39702 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
39703 as described in section
39704 \begin_inset space ~
39708 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39710 reference "sec:Appendices"
39717 \begin_layout Subsection
39719 \begin_inset space ~
39725 \begin_layout Standard
39726 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
39727 default output format for the document (menu
39729 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39730 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39731 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
39733 \begin_inset space ~
39737 \begin_inset space ~
39743 \begin_inset space ~
39747 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39749 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
39753 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
39756 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39757 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
39759 \begin_inset space ~
39762 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
39764 \begin_inset space ~
39767 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
39769 \begin_inset space ~
39773 \begin_inset space ~
39779 \begin_inset space ~
39783 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39785 reference "sec:File-Formats"
39789 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
39790 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
39792 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39793 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
39795 \begin_inset space ~
39798 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
39800 \begin_inset space ~
39803 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
39807 \begin_inset space ~
39811 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39813 reference "sec:File-Formats"
39818 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
39819 when it is first configured.
39820 The default output format is
39823 \begin_inset space ~
39831 \begin_layout Subsection
39832 View (Other Formats)
39835 \begin_layout Standard
39836 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
39837 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
39838 actual document with an external program.
39839 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
39840 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39841 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
39843 All possible formats are listed in section
39844 \begin_inset space ~
39848 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39850 reference "subsec:Export"
39855 You should at least see the menu entry
39860 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
39862 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
39864 \begin_inset space ~
39868 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39870 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
39875 \begin_inset Index idx
39878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39879 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
39888 \begin_layout Standard
39889 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
39890 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
39892 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39893 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
39895 \begin_inset space ~
39898 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
39900 \begin_inset space ~
39903 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
39907 \begin_inset space ~
39911 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39913 reference "sec:File-Formats"
39918 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
39919 when it is first configured.
39922 \begin_layout Subsection
39924 \begin_inset space ~
39930 \begin_layout Standard
39931 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
39932 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
39935 \begin_layout Subsection
39936 Update (Other Formats)
39939 \begin_layout Standard
39940 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
39941 your document without opening a new viewer window.
39944 \begin_layout Subsection
39945 View Master Document
39948 \begin_layout Standard
39949 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
39951 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39955 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39965 \begin_inset space ~
39970 manual for more information on this topic).
39971 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
39972 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
39976 \begin_inset space ~
39980 \begin_inset space ~
39985 generates the output of the whole book, while
39989 will just output the chapter alone.
39992 \begin_layout Standard
39993 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
39994 in the document settings (menu
39996 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39997 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39998 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40000 \begin_inset space ~
40004 \begin_inset space ~
40010 \begin_inset space ~
40014 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40016 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
40020 ) or in the preferences (menu
40022 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40023 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40025 \begin_inset space ~
40028 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40030 \begin_inset space ~
40033 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40035 \begin_inset space ~
40039 \begin_inset space ~
40045 \begin_inset space ~
40049 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40051 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40058 \begin_layout Subsection
40059 Update Master Document
40062 \begin_layout Standard
40063 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
40065 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40069 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40079 \begin_inset space ~
40084 manual for more information on this topic).
40085 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
40086 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
40089 \begin_layout Standard
40090 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
40091 in the document settings (menu
40093 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40094 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40095 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40097 \begin_inset space ~
40101 \begin_inset space ~
40107 \begin_inset space ~
40111 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40113 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
40117 ) or in the preferences (menu
40119 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40120 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40122 \begin_inset space ~
40125 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40127 \begin_inset space ~
40130 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40132 \begin_inset space ~
40136 \begin_inset space ~
40142 \begin_inset space ~
40146 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40148 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40155 \begin_layout Subsection
40157 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40159 name "subsec:Compressed"
40166 \begin_layout Standard
40167 Un/compresses the current document.
40168 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
40169 compression (see the
40171 Additional Features
40173 manual for details).
40176 \begin_layout Subsection
40180 \begin_layout Standard
40181 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
40184 \begin_layout Subsection
40188 \begin_layout Standard
40189 The document settings are described in appendix
40190 \begin_inset space ~
40194 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40196 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
40203 \begin_layout Section
40205 \begin_inset Index idx
40208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40217 \begin_layout Subsection
40221 \begin_layout Standard
40222 Spell checking is explained in section
40223 \begin_inset space ~
40227 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40229 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
40236 \begin_layout Subsection
40240 \begin_layout Standard
40241 The thesaurus is described in section
40242 \begin_inset space ~
40246 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40248 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
40255 \begin_layout Subsection
40257 \begin_inset Index idx
40260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40267 \begin_inset Index idx
40270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40279 \begin_layout Standard
40280 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
40281 the highlighted document part.
40284 \begin_layout Subsection
40290 \begin_inset Index idx
40293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40294 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
40303 \begin_layout Standard
40304 Generates with the help of the program
40306 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
40309 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
40310 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
40311 This feature is not available on Windows.
40314 \begin_layout Subsection
40320 \begin_inset Index idx
40323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40333 \begin_layout Standard
40334 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40339 \begin_inset space ~
40344 to see the full filename paths.
40347 \begin_layout Subsection
40349 \begin_inset Index idx
40352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40361 \begin_layout Standard
40362 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
40363 files as described in section
40364 \begin_inset space ~
40368 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40370 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
40377 \begin_layout Subsection
40379 \begin_inset Index idx
40382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40395 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
40400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40413 \begin_inset Index idx
40416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40417 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
40426 \begin_layout Standard
40427 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
40428 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
40429 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
40430 -packages and programs it needs; see
40432 \begin_inset space ~
40436 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40438 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
40445 \begin_layout Subsection
40449 \begin_layout Standard
40454 dialog as described in detail in appendix
40455 \begin_inset space ~
40459 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40461 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
40468 \begin_layout Section
40470 \begin_inset Index idx
40473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40482 \begin_layout Standard
40483 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
40484 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
40486 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
40490 \begin_layout Standard
40494 \begin_inset space ~
40499 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
40500 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40501 packages and classes found
40502 by \SpecialChar LyX
40504 \begin_inset space ~
40508 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40510 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
40517 \begin_layout Standard
40521 \begin_inset space ~
40526 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
40531 \begin_layout Section
40533 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40535 name "sec:Toolbars"
40542 \begin_layout Standard
40543 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
40544 \begin_inset space ~
40548 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40550 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
40557 \begin_layout Standard
40558 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
40559 This is described in the
40561 Additional Features
40566 \begin_layout Subsection
40568 \begin_inset Index idx
40571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40580 \begin_layout Standard
40581 \begin_inset Graphics
40582 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
40590 \begin_layout Standard
40591 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40597 \begin_layout Standard
40598 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
40603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40615 \begin_inset Note Note
40618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40619 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
40624 manual for more information.
40632 \begin_layout Standard
40633 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40639 \begin_layout Standard
40640 \begin_inset Tabular
40641 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
40642 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
40643 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
40644 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
40646 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40650 \begin_inset Graphics
40651 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
40661 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40665 pull-down box for the environments
40678 \begin_layout Standard
40679 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
40685 \begin_layout Standard
40687 \begin_inset Tabular
40688 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
40689 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
40690 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
40691 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
40692 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40693 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40709 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40715 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
40722 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40723 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40739 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40745 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
40752 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40753 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40775 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
40782 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40783 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40791 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
40799 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40805 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40812 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40813 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40821 arg "spelling-continuously"
40829 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40833 Spellcheck continuously
40839 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40856 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40862 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40869 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40886 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40892 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40899 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40900 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40916 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40922 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40929 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40930 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40946 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40952 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40959 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40960 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40976 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40982 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40989 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40990 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40998 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
41006 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41012 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41014 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41018 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41022 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41031 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41032 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41038 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
41046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41052 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41054 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41058 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41062 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41071 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41072 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41080 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
41088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41094 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
41095 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
41102 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41103 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41119 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41123 Emphasize text, function of the
41125 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41127 \begin_inset space ~
41130 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
41139 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41140 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41160 Set text to noun style, function of the
41162 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41164 \begin_inset space ~
41167 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
41176 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41177 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41185 arg "textstyle-apply"
41193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41197 Format text using the current settings in the
41199 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41201 \begin_inset space ~
41204 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
41213 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41230 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41236 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41237 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
41239 \begin_inset space ~
41248 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41249 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41257 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
41265 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41271 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41278 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41279 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41285 arg "tabular-insert"
41293 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41299 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41306 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41307 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41315 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
41323 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41327 Toggle outline window on/off,
41329 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
41336 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41337 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41345 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
41353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41357 Toggle math toolbar on/off
41363 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41364 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41372 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
41380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41384 Toggle table toolbar on/off
41397 \begin_layout Subsection
41399 \begin_inset Index idx
41402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41411 \begin_layout Standard
41412 \begin_inset Graphics
41413 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
41421 \begin_layout Standard
41422 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41428 \begin_layout Standard
41429 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
41433 \begin_layout Standard
41434 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41440 \begin_layout Standard
41441 \begin_inset Tabular
41442 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
41443 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
41444 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41445 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41446 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41463 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41473 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41474 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41482 arg "layout Enumerate"
41490 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41500 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41509 arg "layout Itemize"
41517 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41527 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41528 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41544 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41554 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41555 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41563 arg "layout Description"
41571 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41581 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41582 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41590 arg "depth-increment"
41598 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41604 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41606 \begin_inset space ~
41610 \begin_inset space ~
41619 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41620 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41628 arg "depth-decrement"
41636 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41642 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41644 \begin_inset space ~
41648 \begin_inset space ~
41657 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41666 arg "float-insert figure"
41674 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41680 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41681 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
41688 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41689 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41697 arg "float-insert table"
41705 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41711 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41712 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
41719 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41720 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41736 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41742 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41749 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41758 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
41766 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41772 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41779 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41780 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41788 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
41796 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41802 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41809 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41826 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41832 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41834 \begin_inset space ~
41843 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41844 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41852 arg "nomencl-insert"
41860 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41866 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41868 \begin_inset space ~
41877 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41878 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41886 arg "footnote-insert"
41894 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41900 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41907 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41908 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41916 arg "marginalnote-insert"
41924 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41930 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41932 \begin_inset space ~
41941 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41958 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41964 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41965 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
41967 \begin_inset space ~
41976 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41985 arg "box-insert Frameless"
41993 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41999 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42006 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42007 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42023 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42029 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42036 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42037 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42059 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42061 \begin_inset space ~
42070 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42071 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42079 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
42087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42093 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42094 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
42101 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42102 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42110 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
42118 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42124 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42125 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
42127 \begin_inset space ~
42136 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42145 arg "dialog-show character"
42153 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42159 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42161 \begin_inset space ~
42164 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
42171 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42180 arg "layout-paragraph"
42188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42194 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42196 \begin_inset space ~
42205 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42206 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42214 arg "thesaurus-entry"
42222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42228 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42242 \begin_layout Subsection
42243 View/Update Toolbar
42244 \begin_inset Index idx
42247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42248 Toolbar ! View / Update
42256 \begin_layout Standard
42257 \begin_inset Graphics
42258 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
42265 \begin_layout Standard
42266 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42272 \begin_layout Standard
42273 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
42277 \begin_layout Standard
42278 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42284 \begin_layout Standard
42285 \begin_inset Tabular
42286 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
42287 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
42288 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42289 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42290 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42291 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42307 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42313 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42320 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42321 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42329 arg "buffer-update"
42337 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42343 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42350 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42351 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42359 arg "master-buffer-view"
42367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42373 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42375 \begin_inset space ~
42384 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42385 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42393 arg "master-buffer-update"
42401 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42407 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42409 \begin_inset space ~
42413 \begin_inset space ~
42422 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42423 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42431 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
42439 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42445 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42446 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42447 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
42448 Synchronize with Output
42454 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42455 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42477 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42478 View (Other Formats)
42484 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42485 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42491 arg "update-others"
42499 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42505 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42506 Update (Other Formats)
42519 \begin_layout Standard
42520 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
42524 \begin_layout Subsection
42528 \begin_layout Standard
42529 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
42530 \begin_inset space ~
42534 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42536 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
42540 , the table toolbar
42541 \begin_inset Index idx
42544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42553 \begin_inset space ~
42558 manual and the math macro toolbar
42559 \begin_inset Index idx
42562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42575 \begin_layout Chapter
42576 The Document Settings
42577 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42579 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
42584 \begin_inset Index idx
42587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42588 Document ! Settings
42596 \begin_layout Standard
42600 \begin_inset space ~
42605 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
42606 is called with the menu
42608 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42612 You can save your document settings as default with the
42614 Save as Document Defaults
42616 button in any dialog.
42617 This will create a template named
42621 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
42622 when you create a new document without
42626 \begin_layout Standard
42631 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
42632 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
42635 \begin_layout Standard
42636 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
42637 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
42638 to find the one you are looking for.
42639 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
42640 the submenus of the dialog.
42642 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42646 \begin_inset space \space{}
42650 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42654 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42657 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
42658 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
42659 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
42662 \begin_layout Section
42666 \begin_layout Standard
42667 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
42669 Document classes are described in section
42670 \begin_inset space ~
42674 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42676 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
42684 \begin_layout Standard
42688 \begin_inset space ~
42693 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
42698 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
42699 as a layout for a document class.
42700 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
42702 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
42711 \begin_layout Standard
42712 Some classes use special class options by default.
42713 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
42717 and you can decide to use them or not.
42718 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
42719 recommended you leave them untouched.
42724 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
42725 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
42730 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42732 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
42737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42738 When you want to use one of the following drivers
42739 \begin_inset Newline newline
42744 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
42747 \begin_inset Newline newline
42750 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
42751 distribution, see section
42756 \begin_inset CommandInset href
42758 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
42771 \begin_layout Standard
42776 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
42777 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
42778 in the background if the child document
42779 is opened without its master.
42780 This way child documents are always compilable.
42781 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
42788 \begin_inset space ~
42796 \begin_layout Standard
42797 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42808 \begin_inset Index idx
42811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42813 packages ! prettyref
42819 \begin_inset Index idx
42822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42824 packages ! refstyle
42829 for cross-references, see section
42830 \begin_inset space ~
42834 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42836 reference "sec:Cross-References"
42843 \begin_layout Section
42847 \begin_layout Standard
42848 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
42849 Please refer to the section
42852 \begin_inset space ~
42860 \begin_inset space ~
42865 manual for details.
42868 \begin_layout Section
42872 \begin_layout Standard
42873 Modules are explained in section
42874 \begin_inset space ~
42878 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42880 reference "subsec:Modules"
42887 \begin_layout Section
42891 \begin_layout Standard
42893 \begin_inset space ~
42897 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42899 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
42906 \begin_layout Section
42910 \begin_layout Standard
42911 The document font settings are described in section
42912 \begin_inset space ~
42916 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42918 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
42925 \begin_layout Section
42929 \begin_layout Standard
42930 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
42942 \begin_inset space ~
42947 and whether it should be a
42950 \begin_inset space ~
42955 can also be specified here.
42958 \begin_layout Standard
42959 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
42960 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
42961 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
42963 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
42966 \begin_layout Standard
42969 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
42972 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
42973 justifies the text on screen.
42974 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
42978 \begin_layout Section
42982 \begin_layout Standard
42983 This dialog is described in sections
42984 \begin_inset space ~
42988 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42990 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
42995 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42997 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
43004 \begin_layout Section
43008 \begin_layout Standard
43009 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
43010 \begin_inset space ~
43014 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43016 reference "subsec:Margins"
43023 \begin_layout Section
43025 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43027 name "sec:Language-encodings"
43032 \begin_inset Index idx
43035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43036 Language ! Encoding
43044 \begin_layout Standard
43045 The document language and quote styles are set here.
43046 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
43047 (the \SpecialChar LyX
43049 is always encoded in utf8).
43050 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
43051 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
43052 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
43053 -command is not known for
43054 a particular character).
43057 \begin_layout Standard
43058 If you use the option
43063 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
43064 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
43065 than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43067 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
43068 exactly one encoding.
43069 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
43072 \begin_layout Standard
43074 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
43075 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
43076 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
43077 installation supports Unicode), choose
43078 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
43079 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
43080 is quite incomplete, so
43081 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
43086 (when \SpecialChar LyX
43087 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
43088 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
43089 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
43090 -commands is not used, because all
43091 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
43092 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
43093 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43094 , two new alternative engines
43095 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
43097 Both engines support Unicode natively.
43099 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
43102 \begin_inset space ~
43110 \begin_inset space ~
43118 \begin_inset space ~
43124 \begin_inset space ~
43128 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43130 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
43135 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
43139 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
43142 \begin_layout Standard
43146 \begin_inset space ~
43151 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43152 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
43154 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43158 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43162 The possible settings are:
43165 \begin_layout Description
43166 Default uses the language package that is selected in
43168 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43169 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43173 \begin_inset space ~
43177 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43179 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
43186 \begin_layout Description
43187 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
43188 format you will use.
43189 In many cases this will be
43194 \begin_inset Index idx
43197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43205 If the newer package
43210 \begin_inset Index idx
43213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43215 packages ! polyglossia
43220 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
43221 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43222 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
43224 this package will be used instead of
43231 \begin_layout Description
43233 \begin_inset space ~
43244 would be more appropriate.
43247 \begin_layout Description
43248 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
43249 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
43253 (for German texts), type in
43256 \begin_inset Newline newline
43261 usepackage{ngerman}
43264 \begin_layout Description
43265 None will not use a language package.
43266 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
43269 \begin_layout Standard
43270 Here is a list with the important encodings:
43273 \begin_layout Description
43275 \begin_inset space ~
43279 \begin_inset space ~
43283 \begin_inset space ~
43290 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43296 \begin_inset Index idx
43299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43301 packages ! inputenc
43307 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
43308 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
43309 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
43313 \begin_layout Description
43314 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
43316 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
43317 commands, which may result in a big
43318 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
43319 -commands are needed.
43322 \begin_layout Description
43324 \begin_inset space ~
43328 \begin_inset space ~
43331 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
43334 \begin_layout Description
43336 \begin_inset space ~
43340 \begin_inset space ~
43343 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
43346 \begin_layout Description
43348 \begin_inset space ~
43351 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
43354 \begin_layout Description
43356 \begin_inset space ~
43360 \begin_inset space ~
43363 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
43364 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
43367 \begin_layout Description
43369 \begin_inset space ~
43373 \begin_inset space ~
43376 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
43380 \begin_layout Description
43382 \begin_inset space ~
43386 \begin_inset space ~
43389 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
43390 ISO-8859-13 encoding
43393 \begin_layout Description
43395 \begin_inset space ~
43399 \begin_inset space ~
43403 \begin_inset space ~
43406 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
43407 \begin_inset space ~
43413 \begin_layout Description
43415 \begin_inset space ~
43419 \begin_inset space ~
43423 \begin_inset space ~
43426 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
43427 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
43430 \begin_layout Description
43432 \begin_inset space ~
43436 \begin_inset space ~
43439 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
43440 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
43441 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43442 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
43443 \begin_inset space ~
43447 \begin_inset space ~
43453 \begin_layout Description
43455 \begin_inset space ~
43459 \begin_inset space ~
43462 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
43463 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
43464 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43466 should try to use the encoding Unicode
43467 \begin_inset space ~
43471 \begin_inset space ~
43477 \begin_layout Description
43479 \begin_inset space ~
43483 \begin_inset space ~
43486 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
43489 \begin_layout Description
43491 \begin_inset space ~
43495 \begin_inset space ~
43498 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
43501 \begin_layout Description
43503 \begin_inset space ~
43507 \begin_inset space ~
43510 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
43513 \begin_layout Description
43515 \begin_inset space ~
43518 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
43521 \begin_layout Description
43523 \begin_inset space ~
43526 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
43529 \begin_layout Description
43531 \begin_inset space ~
43535 \begin_inset space ~
43538 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
43541 \begin_layout Description
43543 \begin_inset space ~
43547 \begin_inset space ~
43553 \begin_layout Description
43555 \begin_inset space ~
43559 \begin_inset space ~
43562 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
43565 \begin_layout Description
43567 \begin_inset space ~
43571 \begin_inset space ~
43577 \begin_layout Description
43579 \begin_inset space ~
43583 \begin_inset space ~
43586 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43592 \begin_inset Index idx
43595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43602 , when using this, set the document language to
43607 \begin_layout Description
43609 \begin_inset space ~
43613 \begin_inset space ~
43616 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43621 , when using this, set the document language to
43624 \begin_inset space ~
43630 \begin_layout Description
43632 \begin_inset space ~
43636 \begin_inset space ~
43639 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43645 \begin_inset Index idx
43648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43650 packages ! japanese
43655 , when using this, set the document language to
43660 \begin_layout Description
43662 \begin_inset space ~
43666 \begin_inset space ~
43669 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43674 , when using this, set the document language to
43679 \begin_layout Description
43681 \begin_inset space ~
43685 \begin_inset space ~
43688 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43693 , when using this, set the document language to
43698 \begin_layout Description
43700 \begin_inset space ~
43703 (EUC-KR) for Korean
43706 \begin_layout Description
43708 \begin_inset space ~
43712 \begin_inset space ~
43716 \begin_inset space ~
43719 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
43722 \begin_layout Description
43724 \begin_inset space ~
43728 \begin_inset space ~
43732 \begin_inset space ~
43735 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
43736 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
43737 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
43740 \begin_layout Description
43742 \begin_inset space ~
43746 \begin_inset space ~
43752 \begin_layout Description
43754 \begin_inset space ~
43758 \begin_inset space ~
43761 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
43762 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
43765 \begin_layout Description
43767 \begin_inset space ~
43771 \begin_inset space ~
43774 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43780 \begin_inset Index idx
43783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43790 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
43793 \begin_layout Description
43795 \begin_inset space ~
43803 \begin_inset space ~
43806 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
43813 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43816 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43823 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
43824 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43826 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
43829 \begin_layout Description
43831 \begin_inset space ~
43835 \begin_inset space ~
43838 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43844 \begin_inset Index idx
43847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43854 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
43857 \begin_layout Description
43859 \begin_inset space ~
43862 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43868 \begin_inset Index idx
43871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43873 packages ! inputenc
43879 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
43883 \begin_layout Description
43885 \begin_inset space ~
43889 \begin_inset space ~
43893 \begin_inset space ~
43896 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
43897 \begin_inset space ~
43903 \begin_layout Description
43905 \begin_inset space ~
43909 \begin_inset space ~
43913 \begin_inset space ~
43916 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
43917 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
43918 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
43922 \begin_layout Description
43924 \begin_inset space ~
43928 \begin_inset space ~
43932 \begin_inset space ~
43935 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
43936 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
43939 \begin_layout Section
43941 \begin_inset Index idx
43944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43951 \begin_inset Index idx
43954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43961 \begin_inset Index idx
43964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43965 Color ! Shaded boxes
43971 \begin_inset Index idx
43974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43975 Color ! Greyed-out notes
43983 \begin_layout Standard
43984 Here you can alter the font color for the
43988 (default: black), for
43991 \begin_inset space ~
43996 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
44000 (default: white) and for
44003 \begin_inset space ~
44013 sets the color back to the default.
44016 \begin_layout Standard
44017 Clicking any button showing
44025 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
44026 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
44027 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
44028 later more quickly.
44031 \begin_layout Standard
44032 Note, if you change the
44035 \begin_inset space ~
44040 font color and use the option
44043 \begin_inset space ~
44048 in the document settings under
44051 \begin_inset space ~
44056 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
44057 \begin_inset space ~
44061 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44063 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
44070 \begin_layout Standard
44071 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
44077 \begin_layout Standard
44081 \begin_inset space ~
44090 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
44093 \begin_inset space ~
44096 Code after a forced page break:
44099 \begin_layout Itemize
44100 For the page color:
44101 \begin_inset Newline newline
44108 pagecolor{color name}
44111 \begin_layout Itemize
44112 For the text color:
44113 \begin_inset Newline newline
44123 \begin_layout Standard
44124 You are restricted to one of
44160 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
44167 \begin_inset space ~
44173 \begin_inset Newline newline
44176 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
44177 names to refer to them:
44180 \begin_layout Itemize
44186 \begin_inset Newline newline
44191 page_backgroundcolor
44194 \begin_layout Itemize
44198 \begin_inset space ~
44204 \begin_inset Newline newline
44212 \begin_layout Itemize
44216 \begin_inset space ~
44222 \begin_inset Newline newline
44230 \begin_layout Itemize
44234 \begin_inset space ~
44240 \begin_inset Newline newline
44248 \begin_layout Standard
44249 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
44252 \begin_inset space ~
44260 \begin_inset space ~
44268 \begin_layout Section
44272 \begin_layout Standard
44273 Here you can adjust the
44277 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
44281 as described in section
44282 \begin_inset space ~
44286 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44288 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
44295 \begin_layout Section
44299 \begin_layout Standard
44300 Here you can specify if a specific citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44306 \begin_inset Index idx
44309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44311 packages ! biblatex
44321 \begin_inset Index idx
44324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44336 \begin_inset Index idx
44339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44347 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
44350 Sectioned bibliography
44352 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44358 \begin_inset Index idx
44361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44363 packages ! bibtopic
44373 , you can select the style files and specify further options.
44374 Finally, you can select a document-specific
44378 for the generation of the bibliography.
44379 For a further description of these possibilities see section
44380 \begin_inset space ~
44384 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44386 reference "sec:Bibliography"
44393 \begin_layout Section
44397 \begin_layout Standard
44398 Here you can define the
44402 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
44404 \begin_inset space ~
44408 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44410 reference "sec:Index"
44417 \begin_layout Section
44421 \begin_layout Standard
44422 The PDF properties are explained in section
44423 \begin_inset space ~
44427 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44429 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
44436 \begin_layout Section
44440 \begin_layout Standard
44441 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
44442 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44448 \begin_inset Index idx
44451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44463 \begin_inset Index idx
44466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44478 \begin_inset Index idx
44481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44493 \begin_inset Index idx
44496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44508 \begin_inset Index idx
44511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44513 packages ! mathdots
44523 \begin_inset Index idx
44526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44528 packages ! mathtools
44538 \begin_inset Index idx
44541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44553 \begin_inset Index idx
44556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44558 packages ! stackrel
44568 \begin_inset Index idx
44571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44573 packages ! stmaryrd
44583 \begin_inset Index idx
44586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44588 packages ! undertilde
44593 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
44596 \begin_layout Description
44597 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
44598 -errors in formulas,
44599 ensure that you have this enabled.
44602 \begin_layout Description
44603 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
44604 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
44605 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
44609 \begin_layout Description
44610 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
44613 \begin_inset space ~
44625 \begin_layout Description
44626 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
44629 \begin_inset space ~
44641 \begin_layout Description
44642 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
44653 \begin_layout Description
44654 mathtools is used for the math commands
44690 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
44697 \begin_layout Description
44698 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
44700 Chemical Symbols and Equations
44709 \begin_layout Description
44710 stackrel is used for the math command
44727 \begin_layout Description
44728 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
44731 \begin_layout Description
44732 undertilde is used for the math command
44740 Accents for one Character
44749 \begin_layout Section
44753 \begin_layout Standard
44754 The float placement options are described in the section
44757 \begin_inset space ~
44765 \begin_inset space ~
44773 \begin_layout Section
44777 \begin_layout Standard
44778 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
44780 Program Code Listings
44785 \begin_inset space ~
44793 \begin_layout Section
44797 \begin_layout Standard
44798 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
44806 set to be used and set the
44811 The itemize environment is described in section
44812 \begin_inset space ~
44816 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44818 reference "sec:Itemize"
44825 \begin_layout Standard
44826 You can furthermore specify a
44829 \begin_inset space ~
44834 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44835 command of the desired character.
44836 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
44843 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
44845 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44849 \begin_inset space \space{}
44853 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
44863 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
44864 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
44867 \begin_layout Standard
44868 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44876 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
44877 -packages in the preamble (menu
44880 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44881 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
44884 \begin_inset space ~
44890 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
44894 usepackage{textcomp}
44897 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
44901 usepackage{amssymb}
44911 \begin_layout Section
44915 \begin_layout Standard
44916 Branches are described in section
44917 \begin_inset space ~
44921 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44923 reference "sec:Branches"
44930 \begin_layout Section
44932 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44934 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
44941 \begin_layout Standard
44942 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
44945 \begin_layout Description
44947 \begin_inset space ~
44951 \begin_inset space ~
44954 Format: The format that is used when you enter
44955 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44959 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44963 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44967 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44971 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44974 View Master Document
44975 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44979 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44982 Update Master Document
44983 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44990 menu or the toolbar.
44991 The default is set in
44993 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
44994 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
44996 \begin_inset space ~
44999 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
45003 \begin_inset space ~
45007 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45009 reference "sec:File-Formats"
45016 \begin_layout Description
45018 \begin_inset space ~
45022 \begin_inset space ~
45025 Output settings for the menu
45027 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
45029 \begin_inset space ~
45035 For a detailed description see section
45037 Reverse DVI/PDF search
45042 \begin_inset space ~
45050 \begin_layout Description
45052 \begin_inset space ~
45056 \begin_inset space ~
45059 Options offers settings for the export format
45067 \begin_inset space ~
45072 will assure that the output follows exactly version
45073 \begin_inset space ~
45076 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
45080 \begin_inset space ~
45085 settings are described in detail in section
45087 Math Output in XHTML
45092 \begin_inset space ~
45101 \begin_inset space ~
45105 \begin_inset space ~
45110 is used for the size of equations in the output.
45113 \begin_layout Description
45115 \begin_inset space ~
45120 Save transient properties
45122 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that
45123 are specific to the user are saved with the document.
45124 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
45128 \begin_layout Itemize
45129 the activation of change tracking
45132 \begin_layout Itemize
45133 the output of tracked changes
45136 \begin_layout Itemize
45137 the recording of the document directory path.
45140 \begin_layout Standard
45141 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when
45142 using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts).
45146 \begin_layout Section
45154 \begin_layout Standard
45155 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
45157 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
45159 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
45161 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
45165 \begin_layout Standard
45166 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45167 -syntax is given in section
45168 \begin_inset space ~
45172 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45174 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
45181 \begin_layout Chapter
45187 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45189 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
45194 \begin_inset Index idx
45197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45206 \begin_layout Standard
45207 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
45209 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45213 It has the following submenus.
45216 \begin_layout Section
45220 \begin_layout Subsection
45224 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45225 User Interface File
45226 \begin_inset Index idx
45229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45230 Customization ! of toolbars
45236 \begin_inset Index idx
45239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45240 Customization ! of menus
45248 \begin_layout Standard
45249 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
45250 interface (ui) file.
45251 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
45259 \begin_layout Description
45264 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
45267 \begin_layout Description
45274 the menu entries in popup context menus
45277 \begin_layout Description
45282 specifies the toolbar buttons
45285 \begin_layout Standard
45286 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
45287 and edit the entries.
45290 \begin_layout Standard
45291 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
45303 entries must be finished with an explicit
45328 and in the case of the
45329 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45333 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45341 The syntax for the entries is:
45344 \begin_layout Standard
45345 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45351 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45359 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45363 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45368 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45374 \begin_layout Standard
45376 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45379 All the \SpecialChar LyX
45380 -functions are listed in the menu
45382 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
45384 \begin_inset space ~
45392 \begin_layout Standard
45393 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
45399 \begin_layout Standard
45400 For example, assuming you use the menu
45402 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
45405 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
45409 \begin_layout Standard
45410 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45416 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45420 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45424 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45428 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45434 \begin_layout Standard
45436 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45440 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45444 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45451 to have the sixth bookmark.
45454 \begin_layout Standard
45458 \begin_inset space ~
45463 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
45464 's toolbar buttons.
45465 The currently available icon sets are compared in
45466 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45469 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
45477 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45481 \begin_layout Standard
45484 Enable tool tips in main work area
45486 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
45490 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45494 \begin_layout Standard
45499 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
45500 should display in the menu
45502 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
45504 \begin_inset space ~
45512 \begin_layout Subsection
45516 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45520 \begin_layout Standard
45523 Restore window layouts and geometries
45526 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
45527 the last \SpecialChar LyX
45531 \begin_layout Standard
45534 Restore cursor positions
45536 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
45540 \begin_layout Standard
45543 Load opened files from last session
45545 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
45549 \begin_layout Standard
45552 Clear all session information
45554 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
45555 sessions (cursor positions, names
45556 of last opened documents, etc.).
45559 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45561 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45563 name "subsec:Backup documents"
45568 \begin_inset Index idx
45571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45580 \begin_layout Standard
45583 Backup original documents when saving
45585 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
45586 it was saved the last time.
45587 It is stored in the
45590 \begin_inset space ~
45596 \begin_inset space ~
45600 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45602 reference "sec:Paths"
45606 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
45609 \begin_inset space ~
45615 The backup file has the file extension
45616 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45624 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45630 \begin_layout Standard
45633 Backup documents, every
45635 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
45638 \begin_layout Standard
45641 Save documents compressed by default
45643 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
45644 \begin_inset space ~
45648 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45650 reference "subsec:Compressed"
45655 This applies to newly created documents only.
45656 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
45659 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45660 Windows & work area
45663 \begin_layout Standard
45666 Open documents in tabs
45668 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
45672 \begin_layout Standard
45677 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
45682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45684 \begin_inset space ~
45688 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45690 reference "sec:Paths"
45694 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
45701 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
45702 documents will be opened in the same running instance
45703 of \SpecialChar LyX
45705 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
45706 instance is created for each file.
45709 \begin_layout Standard
45712 Single close-tab button
45714 is checked, there will only be one close button (
45724 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
45725 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
45726 Regardless of this option, one can always close a tab by middle-clicking
45730 \begin_layout Standard
45731 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
45734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45739 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
45740 before the change takes effect.
45748 \begin_layout Standard
45753 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
45755 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
45757 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
45761 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
45762 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
45763 and only want to close the view in once instance.
45766 \begin_layout Subsection
45768 \begin_inset Index idx
45771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45778 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45780 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
45787 \begin_layout Standard
45788 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
45792 \begin_layout Standard
45793 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
45796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45801 This section only deals with the fonts
45805 the \SpecialChar LyX
45807 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
45810 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45811 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
45822 \begin_layout Standard
45823 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
45840 (depends on the system) as its
45843 \begin_inset space ~
45859 \begin_layout Standard
45860 You can change the font size with the
45867 \begin_layout Standard
45872 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
45874 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45877 points have the size of 1
45878 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45882 \begin_inset space ~
45886 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45888 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
45893 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
45894 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45898 The sizes are explained in detail in section
45899 \begin_inset space ~
45903 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45905 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
45912 \begin_layout Standard
45915 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
45917 enabled, \SpecialChar LyX
45918 needs to redraw the screen less often.
45919 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
45920 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
45921 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
45923 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
45924 \begin_inset space ~
45930 \begin_layout Subsection
45932 \begin_inset Index idx
45935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45936 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
45943 \begin_inset Index idx
45946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45955 \begin_layout Standard
45956 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
45957 by choosing an item in the
45958 list and selecting the
45965 \begin_layout Standard
45966 By checking the option
45970 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
45973 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
45974 \begin_inset space ~
45978 \begin_inset space ~
45983 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
45986 \begin_layout Subsection
45988 \begin_inset Index idx
45991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46000 \begin_layout Standard
46001 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
46005 \begin_layout Standard
46010 enables previewing snippets of your document.
46011 This feature is described in section
46012 \begin_inset space ~
46016 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46018 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
46025 \begin_layout Standard
46026 Checking the option
46029 \begin_inset space ~
46033 \begin_inset space ~
46037 \begin_inset space ~
46042 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
46045 \begin_layout Section
46047 \begin_inset Index idx
46050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46059 \begin_layout Subsection
46063 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46067 \begin_layout Standard
46070 Cursor follows scrollbar
46072 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
46076 \begin_layout Standard
46077 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
46078 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
46079 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
46082 \begin_layout Standard
46085 Scroll below end of document
46087 is self-explanatory.
46090 \begin_layout Standard
46091 In \SpecialChar LyX
46092 one can jump from word to word by pressing
46099 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
46101 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
46102 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
46105 \begin_layout Standard
46108 Sort environments alphabetically
46110 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
46113 \begin_layout Standard
46116 Group environments by their category
46118 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
46121 \begin_layout Standard
46126 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
46137 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46141 \begin_layout Standard
46142 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
46147 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
46148 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
46152 \begin_layout Subsection
46154 \begin_inset Index idx
46157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46164 \begin_inset Index idx
46167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46168 Settings ! Shortcuts
46176 \begin_layout Standard
46181 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
46183 Several binding files are available, among them:
46186 \begin_layout Description
46187 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
46190 \begin_layout Description
46191 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
46203 \begin_layout Description
46204 mac.bind a set of bindings for
46207 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46215 \begin_layout Standard
46216 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
46221 , and binding files for special languages.
46222 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
46223 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46227 \begin_inset space \space{}
46231 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46235 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46239 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
46240 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
46241 will try to use the appropriate binding
46245 \begin_layout Standard
46246 Some binding files, like
46250 , only have a limited scope.
46251 When looking at the end of the file
46255 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
46258 \begin_layout Standard
46262 \begin_inset space ~
46266 \begin_inset space ~
46271 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
46272 in the selected key binding file.
46275 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46277 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46279 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
46284 \begin_inset Index idx
46287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46288 Key Bindings ! Editing
46296 \begin_layout Standard
46297 To add new or modify existing key bindings to your own taste you can use
46298 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
46299 functions and the bound shortcuts.
46300 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
46303 Show key-bindings containing
46306 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
46307 Insert there for example as keyword
46308 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46312 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46315 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
46316 functions that contain
46317 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46321 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46325 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
46326 All \SpecialChar LyX
46327 functions are also listed in the file
46332 that you will find in the
46339 \begin_layout Standard
46340 For example, to add the shortcut
46348 , select the function and press the
46353 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
46354 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
46357 \begin_layout Standard
46358 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
46359 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
46361 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
46362 function names as a semicolon separated list.
46364 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
46369 \begin_layout Standard
46370 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
46373 \begin_layout Standard
46374 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
46376 The syntax of the entries is:
46379 \begin_layout Standard
46385 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46389 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46393 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46398 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46404 \begin_layout Standard
46405 Note, though, that the key combination definition uses a specific syntax.
46406 This applies to the designators of specific modifier keys (e.
46407 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46434 , respectively) as well as to the other keys.
46435 Note particularly that you cannot use non-alphanumeric characters directly
46436 in the definition of the key combination, but must use commands following
46437 the Xlib standard instead (please refer to the existing bind files for
46439 So if you wanted to bind a command to the key combination
46443 , you needed to specify it as
46448 If you use the dialog to edit key bindings, you don't have to care for
46451 transforms your input to the correct syntax.
46454 \begin_layout Subsection
46456 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46458 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
46463 \begin_inset Index idx
46466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46473 \begin_inset Index idx
46476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46477 Settings ! Keyboard Map
46485 \begin_layout Standard
46486 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
46487 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
46488 provides keyboard maps.
46489 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
46490 is a Romanian one, you can enable
46493 \begin_inset space ~
46497 \begin_inset space ~
46502 and select the keyboard map file named
46509 \begin_layout Standard
46518 keyboard map and, if you use the
46522 bindings, you can select the first and second with
46525 arg "keymap-primary"
46531 arg "keymap-secondary"
46534 respectively or toggle between them with
46537 arg "keymap-toggle"
46543 \begin_layout Standard
46544 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46552 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
46561 \begin_layout Standard
46562 You can also specify the mouse
46564 Wheel scrolling speed
46567 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
46571 Middle mouse button pasting
46573 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
46574 inserts the content of the clipboard.
46577 \begin_layout Standard
46585 \begin_inset space ~
46589 \begin_inset space ~
46594 you can select a key for zooming.
46595 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
46598 \begin_layout Subsection
46602 \begin_layout Standard
46603 Input completion is described in section
46604 \begin_inset space ~
46608 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46610 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
46617 \begin_layout Section
46619 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46626 \begin_inset Index idx
46629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46636 \begin_inset Index idx
46639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46648 \begin_layout Standard
46649 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
46650 are normally determined during
46652 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
46655 \begin_layout Description
46657 \begin_inset space ~
46660 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
46661 's working directory.
46662 It is the default when you
46673 \begin_inset space ~
46681 \begin_layout Description
46683 \begin_inset space ~
46686 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
46688 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
46690 \begin_inset space ~
46694 \begin_inset space ~
46702 \begin_layout Description
46704 \begin_inset space ~
46707 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
46713 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
46717 \begin_inset Newline newline
46721 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46733 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
46734 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
46742 \begin_layout Description
46744 \begin_inset space ~
46748 \begin_inset Index idx
46751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46757 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
46758 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
46759 \begin_inset space ~
46763 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46765 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
46773 will be used to save the backups.
46774 \begin_inset Newline newline
46777 Backup files have the ending
46778 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46782 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46788 \begin_layout Description
46790 \begin_inset space ~
46793 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
46794 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
46796 \begin_inset Newline newline
46803 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
46809 You can edit this file with the program
46818 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
46819 in its preferences under
46822 \begin_inset space ~
46828 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
46833 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
46835 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
46836 in your \SpecialChar LyX
46842 and \SpecialChar LyX
46843 need to be running the same time.
46844 \begin_inset Newline newline
46847 The pipe is also used for the
46851 feature, see section
46852 \begin_inset space ~
46856 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46858 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
46863 \begin_inset Newline newline
46866 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
46867 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
46868 \begin_inset Newline newline
46884 \begin_layout Description
46886 \begin_inset space ~
46889 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
46892 \begin_layout Description
46894 \begin_inset space ~
46897 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
46898 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
46899 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
46902 \begin_layout Description
46904 \begin_inset space ~
46907 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
46913 You only need to specify it if you are using
46917 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
46919 For \SpecialChar LyX
46924 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
46928 \begin_layout Description
46930 \begin_inset space ~
46933 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
46934 When \SpecialChar LyX
46935 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
46936 to find it on the system.
46937 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
46939 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
46941 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46945 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46948 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
46949 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
46952 \begin_layout Description
46954 \begin_inset space ~
46957 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
46958 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
46959 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
46960 code or in the document
46962 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
46964 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
46965 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
46966 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
46967 scanned for the input files.
46968 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
46969 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
46971 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths; otherwise
46972 compilation may fail for some documents.
46975 \begin_layout Section
46979 \begin_layout Standard
46980 Here you can insert your
46989 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
46991 \begin_inset space ~
46995 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46997 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
47001 , to mark changes you make as yours.
47004 \begin_layout Section
47006 \begin_inset Index idx
47009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47010 Language ! Settings
47016 \begin_inset Index idx
47019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47020 Settings ! Language
47028 \begin_layout Subsection
47030 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47032 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
47039 \begin_layout Description
47041 \begin_inset space ~
47045 \begin_inset space ~
47048 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
47050 You can find its actual translation status here:
47051 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47053 target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n"
47061 \begin_layout Description
47063 \begin_inset space ~
47066 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
47067 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
47068 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
47069 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
47070 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47074 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47078 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47082 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47086 The most widespread language package is
47091 \begin_inset Index idx
47094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47101 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
47103 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
47104 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
47105 come with the alternative
47111 \begin_inset Index idx
47114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47116 packages ! polyglossia
47121 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
47122 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
47128 The available selections are described in section
47129 \begin_inset space ~
47133 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47135 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
47142 \begin_layout Description
47144 \begin_inset space ~
47147 start If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
47148 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
47149 you can here specify the command to start the package.
47150 An example is the start command
47156 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
47158 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
47162 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
47178 selectlanguage{$$lang}
47183 \begin_layout Description
47185 \begin_inset space ~
47193 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
47194 command toggles the package on and off.
47197 \begin_layout Description
47199 \begin_inset space ~
47203 \begin_inset space ~
47206 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
47210 \begin_layout Description
47212 \begin_inset space ~
47216 \begin_inset space ~
47219 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
47223 \begin_layout Description
47225 \begin_inset space ~
47229 \begin_inset space ~
47232 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
47233 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
47234 used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
47236 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
47243 \begin_layout Description
47245 \begin_inset space ~
47248 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
47250 When this option is not set, the
47253 \begin_inset space ~
47258 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47260 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
47263 \begin_inset space ~
47271 \begin_layout Description
47273 \begin_inset space ~
47279 \begin_inset space ~
47285 When it is not set, the
47288 \begin_inset space ~
47293 is set to the end of the document.
47296 \begin_layout Description
47298 \begin_inset space ~
47302 \begin_inset space ~
47305 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
47306 language will be underlined in blue.
47309 \begin_layout Description
47311 \begin_inset space ~
47315 \begin_inset space ~
47318 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
47319 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
47322 \begin_layout Description
47324 \begin_inset space ~
47327 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
47328 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
47329 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
47330 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
47333 \begin_layout Subsection
47337 \begin_layout Standard
47338 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
47339 \begin_inset space ~
47343 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47345 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
47352 \begin_layout Section
47356 \begin_layout Subsection
47358 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47360 name "subsec:General-output"
47367 \begin_layout Description
47369 \begin_inset space ~
47372 search Commands that will be used for the menu
47374 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
47376 \begin_inset space ~
47382 For a detailed description see section
47384 Reverse DVI/PDF search
47389 \begin_inset space ~
47397 \begin_layout Description
47399 \begin_inset space ~
47402 Options Options for the program
47406 that is used for the export format
47411 \begin_inset space ~
47415 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47417 reference "subsec:Export"
47422 Possible options are listed in the
47427 \begin_inset Newline newline
47431 \begin_inset Flex URL
47434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47436 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
47446 \begin_layout Description
47448 \begin_inset space ~
47452 \begin_inset space ~
47455 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
47458 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
47459 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
47461 \begin_inset space ~
47467 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
47470 \begin_layout Description
47472 \begin_inset space ~
47476 \begin_inset Index idx
47479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47486 \begin_inset Index idx
47489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47490 Settings ! Date format
47495 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
47496 \begin_inset Newline newline
47500 \begin_inset Flex URL
47503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47505 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
47511 \begin_inset Newline newline
47514 For example the format
47515 \begin_inset Newline newline
47519 \begin_inset Newline newline
47522 prints the date as day/month/year.
47525 \begin_layout Description
47527 \begin_inset space ~
47531 \begin_inset space ~
47534 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
47535 is allowed to overwrite on export.
47538 \begin_layout Subsection
47544 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47546 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
47551 \begin_inset Index idx
47554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47555 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
47564 \begin_layout Description
47566 \begin_inset space ~
47574 \begin_inset space ~
47578 \begin_inset space ~
47581 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
47586 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
47607 are used for Cyrillic.
47608 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
47609 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47617 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47621 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
47623 sets up in the background.
47624 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
47627 \begin_layout Description
47629 \begin_inset space ~
47633 \begin_inset space ~
47637 \begin_inset space ~
47641 \begin_inset space ~
47644 options They only have an effect when the program
47648 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
47651 \begin_layout Standard
47652 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
47653 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
47654 manuals of the applications.
47657 \begin_layout Description
47659 \begin_inset space ~
47662 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
47663 \begin_inset space ~
47667 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47669 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
47676 \begin_layout Description
47678 \begin_inset space ~
47681 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
47682 \begin_inset space ~
47686 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47688 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
47695 \begin_layout Description
47697 \begin_inset space ~
47700 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
47701 \begin_inset space ~
47705 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47707 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
47714 \begin_layout Description
47720 \begin_inset space ~
47723 command Command for the program
47725 Check\SpecialChar TeX
47728 that is described in the section
47730 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
47735 Additional Features
47740 \begin_layout Standard
47741 There are additionally the following options:
47744 \begin_layout Description
47746 \begin_inset space ~
47750 \begin_inset space ~
47754 \begin_inset space ~
47758 \begin_inset space ~
47763 \begin_inset space ~
47766 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
47767 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47773 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47777 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47781 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47784 to separate folders.
47785 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
47787 \begin_inset Index idx
47790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47797 \begin_inset Index idx
47800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47809 \begin_layout Description
47811 \begin_inset space ~
47815 \begin_inset space ~
47819 \begin_inset space ~
47823 \begin_inset space ~
47827 \begin_inset space ~
47831 \begin_inset space ~
47834 changes Removes all manually set
47840 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
47841 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
47843 \begin_inset space ~
47848 dialog when changing the document class.
47851 \begin_layout Section
47853 \begin_inset space ~
47857 \begin_inset Index idx
47860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47869 \begin_layout Subsection
47871 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47873 name "subsec:Converters"
47878 \begin_inset Index idx
47881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47890 \begin_layout Standard
47891 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
47892 from one format to another.
47893 You can modify converters or create new ones.
47894 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
47901 \begin_inset space ~
47906 field and press the
47911 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
47915 \begin_inset space ~
47920 drop-down list, modify the
47924 field and press the
47931 \begin_layout Standard
47934 Converter File Cache
47940 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
47942 Maximum Age (in days
47945 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
47946 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
47949 \begin_layout Standard
47950 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
47951 definition, is described in the section
47962 \begin_layout Subsection
47964 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47966 name "sec:File-Formats"
47971 \begin_inset Index idx
47974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47981 \begin_inset Index idx
47984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47993 \begin_layout Standard
47994 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
48004 programs that should be used for certain formats.
48007 \begin_layout Standard
48008 You can also define the
48010 Default output format
48012 that is used when you use
48014 View, Update, View Master Document
48018 Update Master Document
48024 menu or the toolbar.
48027 \begin_layout Standard
48028 More about formats and their options is described in the section
48039 \begin_layout Standard
48040 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
48042 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
48043 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
48044 This is done by specifying a
48049 More about this is described in the section
48060 \begin_layout Chapter
48061 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
48063 \begin_inset Index idx
48066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48073 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48075 name "chap:Units-available-in"
48082 \begin_layout Standard
48084 \begin_inset space ~
48088 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48090 reference "tab:Units"
48094 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
48095 and used in this documentation.
48098 \begin_layout Standard
48099 \begin_inset Float table
48105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48106 \begin_inset Caption Standard
48108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48109 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48124 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
48130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48132 \begin_inset Tabular
48133 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="20" columns="3">
48134 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
48135 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
48136 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
48137 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
48139 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48148 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48157 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48169 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48187 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48198 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48207 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48216 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48245 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48256 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48265 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48270 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48274 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48282 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48293 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48302 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48307 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48311 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48319 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48330 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48343 scaled point (65536
48344 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48348 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48376 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48381 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48385 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48393 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48404 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48418 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48422 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
48426 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48434 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48445 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48454 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48459 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48463 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48482 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48491 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48495 % of original image width
48500 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48511 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48520 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48529 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48542 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48551 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48560 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48582 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48604 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48613 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48644 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48653 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48666 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48675 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48684 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48697 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48706 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48719 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48730 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48739 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48752 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48763 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48772 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48777 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48781 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48789 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48811 \begin_layout Chapter
48813 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48815 name "chap:Credits"
48822 \begin_layout Standard
48823 The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people
48824 (and we would encourage people to contribute!).
48827 \begin_layout Itemize
48830 Alejandro Aguilar Sierra
48833 \begin_layout Itemize
48839 \begin_layout Itemize
48845 \begin_layout Itemize
48851 \begin_layout Itemize
48857 \begin_layout Itemize
48863 \begin_layout Itemize
48869 \begin_layout Itemize
48875 \begin_layout Itemize
48878 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
48881 \begin_layout Itemize
48887 \begin_layout Itemize
48893 \begin_layout Itemize
48899 \begin_layout Itemize
48905 \begin_layout Itemize
48911 \begin_layout Itemize
48917 \begin_layout Itemize
48923 \begin_layout Itemize
48929 \begin_layout Itemize
48930 The \SpecialChar LyX
48932 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
48942 \begin_layout Standard
48943 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
48946 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
48953 \begin_layout Bibliography
48954 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48955 LatexCommand bibitem
48962 The \SpecialChar LyX
48964 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48967 target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits"
48973 \begin_inset Newline newline
48977 \begin_inset Flex URL
48980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48982 http://www.lyx.org/Credits
48990 \begin_layout Bibliography
48991 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48992 LatexCommand bibitem
48993 key "latexcompanion"
48998 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
49000 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
49001 Companion Second Edition.
49004 Addison-Wesley, 2004
49007 \begin_layout Bibliography
49008 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49009 LatexCommand bibitem
49015 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
49018 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
49022 Addison-Wesley, 2003
49025 \begin_layout Bibliography
49026 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49027 LatexCommand bibitem
49036 : A Document Preparation System.
49039 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
49042 \begin_layout Bibliography
49043 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49044 LatexCommand bibitem
49054 The \SpecialChar TeX
49058 Addison-Wesley, 1984
49061 \begin_layout Bibliography
49062 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49063 LatexCommand bibitem
49069 The \SpecialChar TeX
49071 \begin_inset Newline newline
49075 \begin_inset Flex URL
49078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49080 http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html
49088 \begin_layout Bibliography
49089 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49090 LatexCommand bibitem
49096 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
49098 \begin_inset Newline newline
49102 \begin_inset Flex URL
49105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49107 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
49115 \begin_layout Bibliography
49116 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49117 LatexCommand bibitem
49124 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49126 name "Documentation"
49127 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
49134 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
49138 \begin_inset Newline newline
49142 \begin_inset Flex URL
49145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49147 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
49155 \begin_layout Bibliography
49156 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49157 LatexCommand bibitem
49164 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49166 name "Documentation"
49167 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
49172 how to use the program
49174 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
49178 \begin_inset Newline newline
49182 \begin_inset Flex URL
49185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49187 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
49195 \begin_layout Bibliography
49196 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49197 LatexCommand bibitem
49204 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49206 name "Documentation"
49207 target "http://www.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf"
49212 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49218 \begin_inset Index idx
49221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49223 packages ! biblatex
49229 \begin_inset Newline newline
49233 \begin_inset Flex URL
49236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49238 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf
49246 \begin_layout Bibliography
49247 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49248 LatexCommand bibitem
49255 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49257 name "Documentation"
49258 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf"
49263 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49269 \begin_inset Index idx
49272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49280 \begin_inset Newline newline
49284 \begin_inset Flex URL
49287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49289 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf
49297 \begin_layout Bibliography
49298 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49299 LatexCommand bibitem
49306 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49308 name "Documentation"
49309 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
49319 \begin_inset Newline newline
49323 \begin_inset Flex URL
49326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49328 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
49336 \begin_layout Bibliography
49337 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49338 LatexCommand bibitem
49339 key "makeindex-man"
49345 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49348 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
49358 \begin_inset Newline newline
49362 \begin_inset Flex URL
49365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49367 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
49375 \begin_layout Bibliography
49376 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49377 LatexCommand bibitem
49384 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49386 name "Documentation"
49387 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
49397 \begin_inset Newline newline
49401 \begin_inset Flex URL
49404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49406 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
49414 \begin_layout Bibliography
49415 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49416 LatexCommand bibitem
49423 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49425 name "Documentation"
49426 target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
49431 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
49433 \begin_inset Newline newline
49437 \begin_inset Flex URL
49440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49442 http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
49450 \begin_layout Bibliography
49451 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49452 LatexCommand bibitem
49459 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49461 name "Documentation"
49462 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
49467 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49473 \begin_inset Index idx
49476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49484 \begin_inset Newline newline
49488 \begin_inset Flex URL
49491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49493 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
49501 \begin_layout Bibliography
49502 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49503 LatexCommand bibitem
49510 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49512 name "Documentation"
49513 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
49518 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49524 \begin_inset Index idx
49527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49529 packages ! enumitem
49535 \begin_inset Newline newline
49539 \begin_inset Flex URL
49542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49544 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
49552 \begin_layout Bibliography
49553 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49554 LatexCommand bibitem
49561 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49563 name "Documentation"
49564 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
49569 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49575 \begin_inset Index idx
49578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49580 packages ! fancyhdr
49586 \begin_inset Newline newline
49590 \begin_inset Flex URL
49593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49595 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
49603 \begin_layout Bibliography
49604 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49605 LatexCommand bibitem
49612 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49614 name "Documentation"
49615 target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref"
49620 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49626 \begin_inset Index idx
49629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49631 packages ! hyperref
49637 \begin_inset Newline newline
49641 \begin_inset Flex URL
49644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49646 http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref
49654 \begin_layout Bibliography
49655 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49656 LatexCommand bibitem
49663 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49665 name "Documentation"
49666 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
49671 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49677 \begin_inset Index idx
49680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49688 \begin_inset Newline newline
49692 \begin_inset Flex URL
49695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49697 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
49705 \begin_layout Bibliography
49706 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49707 LatexCommand bibitem
49714 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49716 name "Documentation"
49717 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
49722 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49728 \begin_inset Index idx
49731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49733 packages ! prettyref
49739 \begin_inset Newline newline
49743 \begin_inset Flex URL
49746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49748 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
49756 \begin_layout Bibliography
49757 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49758 LatexCommand bibitem
49765 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49767 name "Documentation"
49768 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
49773 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49779 \begin_inset Index idx
49782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49784 packages ! refstyle
49790 \begin_inset Newline newline
49794 \begin_inset Flex URL
49797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49799 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
49807 \begin_layout Bibliography
49808 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49809 LatexCommand bibitem
49816 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49819 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
49824 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
49826 \begin_inset Newline newline
49830 \begin_inset Flex URL
49833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49835 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
49843 \begin_layout Bibliography
49844 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49845 LatexCommand bibitem
49852 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49855 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
49860 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
49862 \begin_inset Newline newline
49866 \begin_inset Flex URL
49869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49871 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
49879 \begin_layout Bibliography
49880 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49881 LatexCommand bibitem
49888 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49891 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
49896 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
49897 for Cyrillic languages:
49898 \begin_inset Newline newline
49902 \begin_inset Flex URL
49905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49907 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
49915 \begin_layout Bibliography
49916 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49917 LatexCommand bibitem
49924 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49927 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
49932 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
49934 \begin_inset Newline newline
49938 \begin_inset Flex URL
49941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49943 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
49951 \begin_layout Bibliography
49952 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49953 LatexCommand bibitem
49960 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49963 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
49968 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
49970 \begin_inset Newline newline
49974 \begin_inset Flex URL
49977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49979 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
49987 \begin_layout Bibliography
49988 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49989 LatexCommand bibitem
49996 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49999 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
50004 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50006 \begin_inset Newline newline
50010 \begin_inset Flex URL
50013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50015 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
50023 \begin_layout Bibliography
50024 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50025 LatexCommand bibitem
50032 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50035 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian"
50040 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50042 \begin_inset Newline newline
50046 \begin_inset Flex URL
50049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50051 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian
50059 \begin_layout Bibliography
50060 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50061 LatexCommand bibitem
50068 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50071 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian"
50076 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50078 \begin_inset Newline newline
50082 \begin_inset Flex URL
50085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50087 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian
50095 \begin_layout Bibliography
50096 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50097 LatexCommand bibitem
50104 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50107 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian"
50112 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50114 \begin_inset Newline newline
50118 \begin_inset Flex URL
50121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50123 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian
50131 \begin_layout Bibliography
50132 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50133 LatexCommand bibitem
50140 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50143 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese"
50148 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50150 \begin_inset Newline newline
50154 \begin_inset Flex URL
50157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50159 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese
50167 \begin_layout Bibliography
50168 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50169 LatexCommand bibitem
50176 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50179 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20"
50184 about new features in
50190 \begin_inset Newline newline
50194 \begin_inset Flex URL
50197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50199 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20
50207 \begin_layout Standard
50208 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
50215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50242 \begin_inset Note Note
50245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50252 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
50253 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
50254 bibliography is the second one:
50262 \begin_layout Standard
50263 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
50264 LatexCommand bibtex
50265 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
50266 options "biblio/alphadin"
50273 \begin_layout Standard
50274 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
50278 \begin_layout Standard
50279 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
50280 LatexCommand printnomenclature
50286 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
50287 LatexCommand printindex